逐释品解释显示巴利原文
4. Paṭiniddesavāravaṇṇanā
开示之摄取的分析注释显示巴利原文
1. Desanāhāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
5 “随义之想”即随义而起的想之状态;也就是说,“开示之摄取”这一想是随义的,是随义而起的,此即其义。显示巴利原文
5.Anvatthasaññatanti atthānugatasaññabhāvaṃ, ‘‘desanāhāro’’ti ayaṃ saññā anvatthā atthānugatāti attho.
“即未说者”是指之前未曾解释过的词句。为显示“我为汝等说法……”等语句的关联,故说“然而于何处……”等。因为注释三藏佛语乃是《导论》之特相,而此三藏佛语在涵摄教法之经句中,以应被注释的方式被把握时,即已被把握。是故他说:“由开示之摄取……展示”云云。显示巴利原文
Avuttamevāti pubbe asaṃvaṇṇitapadameva. ‘‘Dhammaṃ vo’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.420) vacanassa sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kattha panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tepiṭakassa hi buddhavacanassa saṃvaṇṇanālakkhaṇaṃ nettippakaraṇaṃ, tañca pariyattidhammasaṅgāhake suttapade saṃvaṇṇetabbabhāvena gahite gahitameva hoti. Tenāha ‘‘desanāhārena…pe… dassetī’’ti.
“教说之食”以分析那些乐味等为特征。这些在偈颂中,以及此处所引的“乐味、过患……”等,都是以例证的方式加以分析,故有“其中,什么是乐味”等语。这里的“其中”,是指在那首“有乐味、有过患”的偈颂中所说的“什么是乐味”;或者,在此列举的“乐味、过患……”等乐味中,“什么是这里的乐味”——这便是它的含义。其余文句,同理可知。为说明两种乐味——即作业与目的有别、或所缘与能缘有别为特征的两种乐味——而举出两首偈颂;同样,为说明两种过患——欲爱变异的特征和轮回之苦的特征——而举出两首偈颂;也为说明两种出离——“圣道与涅槃”,各举两首偈颂作为例示与说明。显示巴利原文
Yesaṃ assādādīnaṃ vibhajanalakkhaṇo desanāhāro, te gāthāya, idhāpi ca āgate ‘‘assādaṃ ādīnava’’ntiādinā udāharaṇavasena vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamo assādo’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tassaṃ ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’ti gāthāyaṃ vutto katamo assādo. Atha vā ‘‘assādaṃ ādīnava’’ntiādinā yo idha assādādīnaṃ uddeso, tattha katamo assādoti ceti attho. Esa nayo sesesupi. Kammakaraṇatthabhinnassa visayavisayitālakkhaṇassa assādadvayassa nidassanatthaṃ gāthādvayudāharaṇaṃ, tathā kāmavipariṇāmalakkhaṇassa, vaṭṭadukkhalakkhaṇassa cāti duvidhassāpi ādīnavassa nidassanatthaṃ ‘‘ariyamaggo nibbāna’’nti duvidhassāpi nissaraṇassa nidassananidassanatthañca dve dve gāthā udāhaṭā.
在“法确实护佑行法者”这句话中,行法者由于圣道、圣果和涅槃而获得殊胜的护佑。然而,即使已经获得成就的有情,也会由于变异与行苦等而落入悲惨的境地,这似乎正是他们所希求的——带着这种意趣,所以说“若不缘取出离”。因为他随后会说:“与涅槃相比,一切再生都是悲惨的。”显示巴利原文
Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacārinti (jā. 1.10.102-103; netti. 5, 26, 31; peṭako. 22) ettha dhammacārino maggaphalanibbānehi sātisayārakkhā sambhavati, sampattibhavassāpi vipariṇāmasaṅkhāradukkhatāhi duggatibhāvo icchitovāti adhippāyenāha ‘‘nissaraṇaṃ anāmasitvā’’ti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘nibbānaṃ vā upanidhāya sabbā upapattiyo duggatī’’ti.
“应观察”是一种教导方式。而此观察的运作方式、所缘与作者,正是通过“空、世间、摩伽罗阇”这三个词说出的,故他说:“空……敕令”等。其中,诸行的空,可以是因为它们无我的本性,也可以是因为自我是空。由于它们不受支配、缺乏自我的实质,由于它们无我、空虚、自体空无,由此便显示了这两方面,即“不受支配”等。如此便成为超越死亡者:意思是,通过这样的修行,就能成为超越死亡的人。为超越死亡而施设与教导的前行方法,通过宣说现前成就的殊胜之果,所以说道“他所得到的……果”等。显示巴利原文
Avekkhassūti vidhānaṃ. Tassā pana avekkhāya pavattiākāro, visayo, kattā ca ‘‘suññato, lokaṃ, mogharājā’’ti padattayena vuttāti āha – ‘‘suññato…pe… āṇattī’’ti. Tattha saṅkhārānaṃ suññatā anattasabhāvatāya, attasuññatāya ca siyā. Yato te na vasavattino, attasāravirahitā ca, yato te anattā, rittā, tucchā ca attanā, tadubhayaṃ dasseti ‘‘avasavattitā’’tiādinā. Evaṃ maccutaro siyāti evaṃ paṭipattiyā maccutaro bhaveyyāti attho. Parikappetvā vidhiyamānassa maccutaraṇassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadā desanāya paccakkhato sijjhamānaṃ sātisayaṃ phalanti āha ‘‘tassa yaṃ…pe… phala’’nti.
6 “以例证”,即通过举例来说明。其中,“依补特伽罗分别”这一句,表明世尊在乐味等方面的开示有其不共之处,是为饶益利根等种种补特伽罗而作的。显示巴利原文
6.Udāharaṇavasenāti nidassanavasena. Tattha ‘‘puggalavibhāgenā’’ti iminā ugghaṭitaññuādipuggalapayojito assādādīsu bhagavato desanāvisesoti dasseti.
“即所结合者”:仅仅是由意门识相续随耳门之路而缘取的。所谓“具有常见等相者”,是指具有常见、断见之相的人。这两种邪见必须通过法的教说来动摇,单凭随顺忍或如实智则无法做到。在这四者中,意趣是共通的。对此也曾这样说过:显示巴利原文
Ghaṭitamattanti sotadvārānusārena manodvārikaviññāṇasantānena ālambitamattaṃ. Sassatādiākārassāti sassatucchedākārassa. Idañhi dvayaṃ dhammadesanāya cāletabbaṃ, na anulomikakhanti, yathābhūtañāṇaṃ vā. Etasmiñhi catukke āsayasāmaññatā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“常见与断见,及随顺忍,”
如实智,便称作“依止”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhī ca, khanti cevānulomikā; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaññita’’nti. (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.136; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā; sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā, verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; vi. vi. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā);
“calanā”意指镇伏。“parānuvatti”意指断除。关于“ugghaṭitaññū”(略说即知者),应当依词根分解等方式来理解它的构词原理:在略说时便能了知,故称略说即知者。而“vipañcita”(广说),如同“日月天子运行不规律”等经文中那样,是作为概念中性词的说明,所以注疏说“缓缓地、次第地”。显示出离、过患的出离、乐味的过患与出离,这三种说明能够调伏三类所化者。显示巴利原文
Calanāyāti vikkhambhanāya. Parānuvattiyāti samucchedanāya. Ugghaṭite jānātīti ugghaṭitaññūti mūlavibhujādipakkhepena saddasiddhi veditabbā. Vipañcitanti ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya bhāvanapuṃsakaniddesoti āha ‘‘mandaṃ saṇika’’nti. Nissaraṇaādīnavanissaraṇaassādādīnavanissaraṇānaṃ vibhāvanā veneyyattayavinayanasamatthā.
“四种”是指:乐味、过患、乐味与过患、乐味与出离,共为四种。若显示出离便足以调伏所化,为何不取第五种?答曰:“因为已说过‘过患’了。”如果这个道理是针对略说即知者而言,单凭出离即可成就;若针对广说即知者或需引导者,则应当说“过患与出离”或者“乐味、过患与出离”吧?然而并没有那样宣说,所以不取第五种。因此才说“由已说‘过患’故”等。“教说”是总体把握之后,再特别指明为“经里某一部分或一首偈颂”。这里不取“仅得文句者”,是因为他还没有触及那带有方便善巧的、真正的出离。显示巴利原文
Cattāroti assādo ca ādīnavo ca assādo ādīnavo ca assādo nissaraṇañcāti ete cattāro. Yadi nissaraṇavibhāvanā veneyyavinayanasamatthā, kasmā pañcamo na gahitoti āha ‘‘ādīnavāvacanato’’ti. Yadi hi ugghaṭitaññuṃ sandhāya ayaṃ nayo vuccati, nissaraṇamattena siddhaṃ siyā. Atha vipañcitaññuṃ, neyyaṃ vā, ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca assādo ca ādīnavo nissaraṇañca vattabbo siyā? Tathā appavattattā na gahito. Tenāha ‘‘ādīnavāvacanato’’tiādi. Desananti sāmaññato gahitaṃ ‘‘suttekadesaṃ gāthaṃ vā’’ti viseseti. Padaparamaaggahaṇañcettha saupāyassa nissaraṇassa anāmaṭṭhattā.
所谓“善”是指可爱异熟,“恶”是指不可爱异熟,因此说“这是乐味,这是过患”。利养等是福果,或是为了随顺这些,故说“这是乐味”。相反地,失利养等即有过患,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kalyāṇa’’nti iminā iṭṭhavipāko, ‘‘pāpaka’’nti aniṭṭhavipāko adhippetoti āha ‘‘ayaṃ assādo, ayaṃ ādīnavo’’ti. Lābhādīnaṃ puññaphalattā tadanurodhaṃ vā sandhāya ‘‘ayaṃ assādo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tabbipariyāyena alābhādīnaṃ ādīnavatā veditabbā.
“欲”是指与烦恼欲相伴的所缘欲。“以不端正之相”即是以不合宜的方式。“扰乱”即压碎、扰乱。“我已出家”即我已进入出家状态。“真实无谬”即不会失误的。“沙门性”即是沙门的状态。唯有止息罪恶的状态,才是更好、更殊胜的。显示巴利原文
Kāmāti kilesakāmasahitā vatthukāmā. Virūparūpenāti appatirūpākārena. Mathentīti maddanti. Pabbajitomhīti pabbajjaṃ upagato amhi. Apaṇṇakanti avirajjhanakaṃ. Sāmaññanti samaṇabhāvo. Samitapāpabhāvoyeva seyyo sundarataro.
其中,“种种欲妙乐,甜美而可意”是乐味;“以不端正之相扰乱心”是过患;“真实无谬的沙门性”是出离。因此(注疏)说:“此……乃至……及出离”。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘kāmā hi citrā madhurā manoramā’’ti ayaṃ assādo, ‘‘virūparūpena mathenti citta’’nti ayaṃ ādīnavo, ‘‘apaṇṇakaṃ sāmañña’’nti idaṃ nissaraṇanti āha ‘‘ayaṃ…pe… nissaraṇañcā’’ti.
因为经中以一种方式及三种方式列举了果等,所以(注疏)说“也以两种方式”。显示巴利原文
Phalādīnaṃ ekakavasena ca tikavasena ca pāḷiyaṃ udāhaṭattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dukavasenapī’’ti.
“乐行道(sukhā paṭipadā)”和“苦行道(dukkhā paṭipadā)”这两种行道,每一者又依迟钝通达与速通达而各有两种,因此说“据行道与通达所作的区分,即是依行道而作的区分”。先前已作预备业者,在地遍等中,最初生起的“地……”等作意,即是第一等至(paṭhamasamannāhāro)。“近行(upacāra)”指近行定(upacārajjhāna)。禅那因为是所应行之道,故亦称为“行道(paṭipadā)”。与较低的智相比,其余更高的智则称为“通达(abhiññā)”。显示巴利原文
Sukhā paṭipadā, dukkhā paṭipadāti yā dve paṭipadā, tāsu ekekā dandhakhippābhiññatāya dve dve hontīti āha ‘‘paṭipadābhiññākato vibhāgo paṭipadākato hotī’’ti. Katapubbakiccassa pathavīkasiṇādīsu sabbapaṭhamaṃ ‘‘pathavī’’tiādinā pavattamanasikāro paṭhamasamannāhāro. Upacāranti upacārajjhānaṃ. Paṭipajjitabbatāya jhānampi ‘‘paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Tadaññā heṭṭhimapaññato adhikā paññāti katvā ‘‘abhiññā’’ti vuccati.
“烦恼(kilese)”指盖的种类(nīvaraṇappakāra)以及与彼俱行的烦恼。“诸支显现(aṅgapātubhāva)”指获得寻等禅支。显示巴利原文
Kileseti nīvaraṇappakāre, taṃsahagatakilese ca. Aṅgapātubhāvanti vitakkādijhānaṅgapaṭilābhaṃ.
「入」即安立。「把握色与无色」指以相等相简择而把握色法、无色法。若问:已把握色与无色者,其道的显现迟缓,是否可能出自确定名色等的难成?难道不应仅由「把握色与无色的困难」而说为苦行道吗?并非如此。即使对确定名色等,由于对立烦恼微薄而容易成就,但因为与此成就之观相应的诸根迟钝,道仍会显现迟缓;因此,即使毫无困难地把握了色与无色,若把握本身是困难的,则更不待言。其余情况也依此理解。「确定名色」是指如理确定:「这仅是名与色,别无所谓众生等。」此中何者较合理?在「一次、两次、数百次」等的镇伏次数中,一次、两次的镇伏尚属乐行道,超过则非乐行道,故应知从第三次镇伏起即为苦行道。再者,于诸行聚观之终、生灭随观现前时,因对观随烦恼作三次镇伏的困难情形,当知即是苦行道。在此,即使行道本身不迟缓,而此人显示巴利原文
Abhinivisantoti paṭṭhapento. Rūpārūpaṃ pariggaṇhantoti rūpārūpadhamme lakkhaṇādīhi paricchinditvā gaṇhanto. Pariggahitarūpārūpassa maggapātubhāvadandhatā ca nāmarūpavavatthānādīnaṃ kicchasiddhiyā siyāti na rūpārūpapariggahakicchatāya eva dukkhāpaṭipadatā vattabbāti ce? Na, nāmarūpavavatthāpanādīnaṃ paccanīkakilesamandatāya sukhasiddhiyampi tathāsiddhavipassanāsahagatānaṃ indriyānaṃ mandatāya maggapātubhāvato. Rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvāti akicchenapi pariggahetvā, kicchena pariggahite vattabbameva natthi. Evaṃ sesesupi. Nāmarūpaṃ vavatthāpentoti ‘‘nāmarūpamattametaṃ, na añño koci sattādiko’’ti vavatthāpanaṃ karonto. Kataro panettha vāro yuttarūpoti? Yo koci sakiṃ, dvikkhattuṃ, anekasatakkhattunti evamādīsu hi vikkhambhanavāresu sakiṃ, dvikkhattuñca vikkhambhanavāro sukhā paṭipadā eva, na tato uddhaṃ sukhā paṭipadā hoti, tasmā tikkhattuṃ vikkhambhanavārato paṭṭhāya dukkhā paṭipadā veditabbā. Apica kalāpasammasanāvasāne udayabbayānupassanāya uppannassa vipassanupakkilesassa tikkhattuṃ vikkhambhanena kicchatāvāro dukkhā paṭipadā veditabbā. Ettha dandhattā paṭipadāya etassa akicchattepi purimānaṃ kicchatte dukkhāpaṭipadatā vuttanayāva. Yassa pana sabbattha akicchatā, tassa paramukkaṃsagatā sukhā paṭipadā veditabbā.
正如由把握名色的困难及道显现的迟钝,而说为苦行道迟通达;与此相反,便是第四种;由两者相混杂的状态,而有第二、第三种,应当了知。为了说明此义,故说「依此……应知」。因为所指的是从轮回之苦出离,所以说「这确实属于观的部分」。显示巴利原文
Yathā nāmarūpapariggahakicchatāya maggapātubhāvadandhatāya dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā vuttā, tathā tabbipariyāyena catutthī, tadubhayavomissatāvasena dutiyā, tatiyā ca ñātabbāti dassento āha ‘‘iminā…pe… veditabbā’’ti. Vaṭṭadukkhato niyyānassa adhippetattā ‘‘vipassanāpakkhikā evā’’ti vuttaṃ.
在「因、方法、果」这一句中,于此,贪行性与钝慧为第一道的因,贪行性与利慧为第二道的因,见行性与钝慧为第三道的因,见行性与利慧为第四道的因。方法,则依次为念、定、精进、慧诸根,以及作为亲依止缘的念处、禅那、正勤与谛。果,即是从轮回之苦中出离。显示巴利原文
Hetupāyaphalehīti ettha taṇhācaritatā, mandapaññatā ca paṭhamāya paṭipadāya hetu, taṇhācaritatā, udatthapaññatā ca dutiyāya, diṭṭhicaritatā, mandapaññatā ca tatiyāya, diṭṭhicaritatā, udatthapaññatā ca catutthiyā. Upāyo pana yathākkamaṃ satisamādhivīriyapaññindriyāni , satipaṭṭhānajhānasammappadhānasaccāni ca upanissayabhūtāni. Phalaṃ vaṭṭadukkhato niyyānaṃ.
「以定为门」:以定为门,即通过修习而随入。因此他说「以止为先行的观」。「这里」:意指于这部《导论》中。他将说:「由离贪于贪,心解脱是有学果」以及「由离贪于贪,心解脱是超越欲界」。此即阿那含果。显示巴利原文
Samādhimukhenāti samādhimukhena bhāvanānuyogena. Tenevāha ‘‘samathapubbaṅgamāya vipassanāyā’’ti. Idhāti imasmiṃ nettippakaraṇe. Vakkhati ‘‘rāgavirāgā cetovimutti sekkhaphala’’nti, ‘‘rāgavirāgā cetovimuttikāmadhātusamatikkama’’nti ca. Soti anāgāmī.
「由彼」:指由对治的一方。「从那」:即从对治方。将「心解脱」等词以同依格的方式复合后,为了以异依格的方式来说明,而说「或者」等。又通过「心的……或者」等,以别词义的方式显示「心解脱」等词的复合。由于以「识」的同义词「心」来建立的那种连结是不成立的,因此他说「随其所应」。显示巴利原文
Tenāti paṭipakkhena. Tatoti paṭipakkhato. Samānādhikaraṇavasena ca cetovimuttisaddānaṃ samāsaṃ katvā bhinnādhikaraṇavasena vattuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Puna ‘‘cetaso vā’’tiādinā aññapadatthavasena cetovimuttipadānaṃ samāsaṃ dasseti. Viññāṇapariyāyena ceto-saddena vuttayojanā na sambhavatīti āha ‘‘yathāsambhava’’nti.
「hā」字表示趣向之义,此处的趣向意指智趣,故注释者说「hātabbā」为「应使趣向」。「netabbā」意为「应使了知」。显示巴利原文
Hā-saddo gatiattho, gati cettha ñāṇagati adhippetāti āha ‘‘hātabbāti gametabbā’’ti. Netabbāti ñāpetabbā.
7 「彼」指补特伽罗的分别。「以智分别」是指依闻所成等智的差别来进行分别。「生起」即产生。「于彼」指在那个作为略知者等补特伽罗分别之所依的开示分别中。「于开示中」即在经中。「为显示彼」是为了显示该补特伽罗分别。有些人这样读:“如是,此理趣如何产生?”显示巴利原文
7.Tanti puggalavibhāgaṃ. Ñāṇavibhāgenāti sutamayādiñāṇappabhedena. Nibbattananti uppādanaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ ugghaṭitaññutātiādipuggalavibhāgabhūte desanābhājane. Desanāyanti sutte. Taṃ dassetunti taṃ puggalavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ. ‘‘Svāyaṃ hāro kathaṃ sambhavatī’’ti keci paṭhanti.
对前述类型法义的审察慧。「从职责」:指从“导师开示法”等职责方面而言。「从能力」:指从能调伏略知者等所化者的能力状态而言。在“教法的受持”这句中,也应将“从职责或从能力”引过来加以结合。显示巴利原文
Sāti vuttappakāradhammatthānaṃ vīmaṃsanapaññā. Adhikāratoti ‘‘satthā vā dhammaṃ desayatī’’tiādiadhikārato. Sāmatthiyato ugghaṭitaññuādiveneyyavinayanasamatthabhāvato. Pariyattidhammassa upadhāraṇanti etthāpi ‘‘adhikārato sāmatthiyato vā’’ti ānetvā yojetabbaṃ.
依第一种分别,是以审察等理趣为随伴的;依第二种分别,是具足审察等分类的;由作为因的寻思所生故,为思所成慧。依循如此所说的理路,即可加以配合,因此他说:“其余部分,即如已说的理趣。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Vīmaṃsādipariyāyavatī paṭhamavikappavasena, vīmaṃsādivibhāgavatī dutiyavikappavasena, cintāya hetubhūtāya nibbattā cintāmayī’’ti evamādivuttanayānusārena sakkā yojetunti āha ‘‘sesaṃ vuttanayamevā’’ti.
“在闻思所成慧中”:意指在闻所成慧与思所成慧当中,以及涵盖此二者的闻思所成慧中。这里的“在闻思所成慧中”应理解为以部分代表整体的省略说法。因为大菩萨们正是依止于思所成慧,在最后一生中才起始修观,而其他声闻则依止于闻思所成慧。“以他们”:指那些如此诵读者。“依所说的方法”:指在行道论中所说“把握所造色,把握非色”等方法。显示巴利原文
Sutacintāmayañāṇesūti sutamayañāṇe ca cintāmayañāṇe ca sutacintāmayañāṇesu ca sutacintāmayañāṇesūti ekadesasarūpekaseso veditabbo. Cintāmayañāṇeyeva hi patiṭṭhitā mahābodhisattā carimabhave vipassanaṃ ārabhanti, itare sutacintāmayañāṇesūti. Tehīti tathā paṭhantehi. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘upādārūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, arūpaṃ pariggaṇhātī’’tiādinā paṭipadākathāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 5) vuttanayena.
8 意为:他者的音声是生起此智的缘。而“由自内生起的如理作意”——应知此句是依回转的方式,转过来作为第二项缘。这样,便将弟子们修所成慧的生起也涵括在内。或者,这里之所以特指弟子智的生起,是因为提到了略知者等类别。若依此说,则前文所述的省略理趣即应视为已被排除。“由希求、加行与觉了的已成就故”——以此指出,作为后二双道先前因而被涵括的闻、思所成慧,是指“这两种慧存在”。这些慧的存在,应知是因为没有对立面的逼迫,源于未加审察,无所造作,以及先前已成就了闻所成慧。显示巴利原文
8. Parato ghoso paccayabhūto etissāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Paccattasamuṭṭhitena ca yonisomanasikārenā’’ti idaṃ āvuttinayena dutiyaṃ āvaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ. Tena sāvakānaṃ bhāvanāmayañāṇuppatti saṅgahitā hoti. Sāvakānameva vā ñāṇuppatti idhādhippetā ugghaṭitaññuādivibhāgakathanato. Etasmiṃ pakkhe pubbe vuttaekasesanayopi paṭikkhitto daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Āsayapayogapabodhassa nipphāditattā’’ti etena pacchimacakkadvayapariyāpannāni pubbahetusaṅgahāni sutacintāmayañāṇāni sandhāya ‘‘imā dve paññā atthī’’ti vuttanti dasseti. Atthibhāvo cetāsaṃ paṭipakkhena anupaddutatā veditabbā. Aparikkhatattā anabhisaṅkhatattā. Sutamayañāṇassāpi purimasiddhassa.
9 “以教说、行道、智的区分”:指出离教说等教说的区分,苦行道等行道的区分,以及闻所成智等智慧的区分。显示巴利原文
9.Desanāpaṭipadāñāṇavibhāgehīti nissaraṇadesanādidesanāvibhāgehi, dukkhāpaṭipadādipaṭipadāvibhāgehi, sutamayañāṇādiñāṇavibhāgehi.
“以剩余的会众”:指属于刹帝利、居士等会众。“八种”:即刹帝利众、婆罗门众、居士众、沙门众、四天王众、三十三天众、魔众、梵天众这八种众。显示巴利原文
Avasiṭṭhapārisajjenāti khattiyagahapatiparisapariyāpannena. Aṭṭhannanti khattiyaparisā brāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmaparisāti imāsaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ.
“Samattheti”(使之成就),意为作有效的连结。显示巴利原文
Samatthetīti samatthaṃ sambandhatthaṃ karoti.
阐明那十二支的状态即是连结。“其义”:指六六理趣之义。由于六六理趣摄集一切教法,且其义被《转法轮经》所收摄,因此才说“阐明一切……乃至……令其开显”。这是指文词以所缘性、义理以所缘性而成连结,故说“这些……的连结状态”。显示巴利原文
Tameva dvādasapadabhāvaṃ dīpetvāti sambandho. Tadatthassāti chachakkapariyāyatthassa (ma. ni. 3.420 ādayo). Sabbapariyattidhammasaṅgāhakattā chachakkapariyāyassa, tadatthassa ca dhammacakkappavattena suttena (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) saṅgahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbassāpi…pe… vibhāvento’’ti. Visayibhāvena byañjanapadānaṃ, visayabhāvena atthapadānaṃ sambandhaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tesaṃ…pe… sambandhabhāva’’nti.
词的成分是字母。“词义”即词义的成分。“执取词义”是指对词义的理解。“差别施设”是指殊胜的生起。“语句差别”是指在语句的殊胜处。“令心喜悦”就是令心满足。“智慧磨砺”是指以慧磨砺令其锐利。由于以词等也能开显,因此“以多种语句为所缘”也能成立。因为如果只以单一语句为所缘,那么对于词义的开显等,就应当只以字母等为所缘,这便成了一种定则。“以此”是指词义以多种语句为所缘之义。显示巴利原文
Padāvayavo akkharāni. Padatthoti padatthāvayavo. Padatthaggahaṇassāti padatthāvabodhassa. Visesādhānaṃ visesuppatti. Vākyabhedeti vākyavisese. Cittaparitosanaṃ cittārādhanaṃ. Buddhinisānaṃ paññāya tejanaṃ tikkhabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Nānāvākyavisayatāpi siddhā hoti padādīhipi saṅkāsanassa siddhattā . Ekavākyavisayatāya hi atthapadānaṃ saṅkāsanādayo yathākkamaṃ akkharādivisayā evāti niyamo siyā. Etenāti atthapadānaṃ nānāvākyavisayatthena.
“以开显等为涵义”:即是开显、分析、引导与作用。显示巴利原文
Ugghaṭanādiatthānīti ugghaṭanavipañcananayanappayojanāni.
10 10. “于此站立”即upaṭṭhita,为了显示upaṭṭhita一词的处格意义,所以说“站立之处”,犹如“善行”一样。因此他说“这是他们……”等。“以行道、教说、到达”:是指行道的到达与教说的到达。经中说:“此世间确实陷入大困难了,出生……乃至……老死”等,从老死开始,以缘起为门径,深深专注于观照。就好像为了砍断大丛林而在磨刀石上磨利斧头一样,世间的救护者为了砍断烦恼的丛林,磨利智慧之斧。由于他已经具足了证得佛果的善因,业报已经成熟,为了证得一切知智,他不断地增益观照的胎藏。在修行期间,他反复进入各种禅定,依“随观法”的方法,来审察种种形态、种种方式的有为法。此时他所发起的、以三十六万亿种行相表现出来的智慧,就被称为“大金刚智”。而在义注中另有提到“以二十四万亿禅定运行的大金刚智”,那是指日常维持的禅定,也就是那些前引智和后随智。但后面将要说的“以智金刚破除无明之网”,则应当被理解为是与观智一同生起的道智。“这是梵行”:指的是教法梵行,为了表明这个意思,才接着说“梵天的……”等。显示巴利原文
10. Upatiṭṭhati etthāti upaṭṭhitanti upaṭṭhitasaddassa adhikaraṇatthataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘upatiṭṭhanaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘padakkanta’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ nesa’’ntiādi. Paṭipattidesanāgamanehīti paṭipattigamanadesanāgamanehi. ‘‘Kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno jāyati ca…pe… jarāmaraṇassā’’tiādinā jarāmaraṇato paṭṭhāya paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisitvā mahāgahanaṃ chindituṃ nisānasilāyaṃ pharasuṃ nisento viya kilesagahanaṃ chindituṃ lokanātho ñāṇapharasuṃ tejento buddhabhāvāya hetusampattiyā paripākagatattā sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamāya vipassanāgabbhaṃ gaṇhāpento antarantarā nānāsamāpattiyo samāpajjitvā anupadadhammavipassanāvasena anekākāravokārasaṅkhāre sammasanto chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena yaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattesi, taṃ ‘‘mahāvajirañāṇa’’nti vadanti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattisañcārimahāvajirañāṇa’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.141) āgataṃ, taṃ devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakasamāpattīnaṃ purecarānucarañāṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana vakkhati ‘‘ñāṇavajiramohajālapadālana’’nti, taṃ saha vipassanāya maggañāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Etaṃ brahmacariyanti sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ adhippetanti taṃ dassento ‘‘brahmuno’’tiādimāha.
“以教说”:此词在此处作具格,表示手段意义。“已连结”:在此显示其含有“原因”的意义,为了说明此原因意义已被引入其中,所以才解释为“已将其择出而结合”。显示巴利原文
Desanāyāti karaṇatthe idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Niyuttoti ettha hetuattho antonītoti dassento ‘‘niddhāretvā yojito’’ti āha.
2. 简择理趣分别的注释显示巴利原文
2. Vicayahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
11 应当从词性、特征、时态、语态、格、数等差别入手,从音声方面对词(pada)进行辨析。在作这种辨析时,唯有依循语言本身如实自然的方式,才算做得善巧。为了说明这一道理,先陈述“此名为词……此是从音声上辨析词”,随后再说“然而此……”等。
“应阐述之义”(vattabbaatthasaṃvaṇṇanā),即是阐明每个词所表之义的种种差别,并以种种方式加以展开、讲明。显示巴利原文
11. Jātiliṅgakālasādhanavibhattisaṅkhyāvisesādito saddato padavicayo kātabbo. Tattha kariyamāno ca yathāsabhāvaniruttiyā eva kato sukato hotīti dassento ‘‘idaṃ nāmapadaṃ…pe… ayaṃ saddato padavicayo’’ti vatvā ‘‘so panāya’’ntiādimāha. Vattabbaatthasaṃvaṇṇanāti taṃtaṃpadavacanīyassa atthassa bhedaṃ vatvā pariyāyehi vivaritvā kathanaṃ.
“所审察的经句”(viciyamānassa suttapadassā),即是指以提问方式出现的经句。有人说“经中的语句也全都是以提问方式出现的”,其实并非所有经句都如此。对于一个词可能有的众多意义,将之提取出来,便称为“义的提取”(atthuddhāra);而对于一个意义可能对应的众多词,将之提取出来,则称为“词的提取”(paduddhāra)。在注释所有经句时所得的一切意义,都是词义。
所谓“九种经”(nava suttante),这里的意思是:取经、祇夜等九种类型的内容来进行审察、思择——应这样连接。或者,也可以理解为:以九种分类的经典而言,所有经、祇夜等这九种经典都应审察——这就是其含义。因此才说“经、祇夜等”。显示巴利原文
Viciyamānassa suttapadassāti pucchāvasena pavattasuttapadassa. ‘‘Suttantarapadānipi pucchāvaseneva pavattānī’’ti vadanti ‘‘na sabbampi suttapada’’nti. Ekasseva padassa sambhavantānaṃ anekesaṃ atthānaṃ uddhāro atthuddhāro. Ekasseva pana atthassa sambhavantānaṃ anekesaṃ padānaṃ uddhāro paduddhāro. Sabbe hi saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte labbhamāne sabbe padatthe. Nava suttanteti suttageyyādivasena navappakāre suttasmiṃ ānetvā vicinatīti yojanā. Atha vā ‘‘sabbe nava suttante’’ti iminā pavicayalakkhaṇena hārena suttageyyādīni sabbānipi navappakārāni suttāni vicinatīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘suttageyyādike’’tiādi.
“Kosalānaṃ purā rammā”(《经集》982)等五十六首偈颂,为“事偈”(vatthugāthā);而“Pārāyanamanugāyissaṃ”(《经集》1137起)等十九首偈颂,则是“随颂偈”(anugītigāthā)。此名如何安立?——即此名为“到彼岸”(pārāyana)。因此说道:“这些法堪能令人至彼彼岸,故此教示(dhammapariyāya)之名即为‘到彼岸’”(《经集·彼岸赞偈》、《小部·彼岸赞偈》149起)。所谓“于心中转起”,是指当具寿大迦旃延解说此审察理趣分别(vicayahāravibhaṅga)时,他将此法义于自智慧中现前、运转,而后如此宣说——当如此连贯理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kosalānaṃ purā rammā’’tiādikā (su. ni. 982) chapaññāsa gāthā vatthugāthā. ‘‘Pārāyanamanugāyissa’’nti (su. ni. 1137 ādayo) pana ādikā ekūnavīsati gāthā anugītigāthā. Idaṃ nāmaṃ katanti idaṃ ‘‘pārāyana’’nti nāmaṃ kataṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pāraṃ gamanīyā ime dhammā, tasmā imassa dhammapariyāyassa ‘pārāyanantveva adhivacana’’’nti (su. ni. pārāyanatthutigāthā; cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthā 149 ādayo). Buddhiyaṃ viparivattamānanti imassa vicayahāravibhaṅgassa desanākāle āyasmā mahākaccāno attano buddhiyaṃ vattamānaṃ katvā evamāhāti yojanā.
所谓“一分记说”(ekaṃsabyākaraṇa),即应作肯定决断回答者;或因应以一分方式作答,故称一分记说,意谓宜用一分记说方式处理。对其余二词(应分别记说、应反问记说),理趣亦然。“应搁置”(ṭhapanīya),即因其应被搁置,故作不应作答——此即其义。若有人因他缘成熟而对障碍法生疑,为断疑而问,即可说此为“为断疑”(vimaticchedana)之问。然而,若问者本不知障碍法,是出于求知之意而问,则亦可能为“未见照明”(adiṭṭhajotanā)之问。正如后文将说:“不知世间障碍等者”。显示巴利原文
Ekaṃsabyākaraṇassa ayanti ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyā, ekaṃsena vā byākātabbattā ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyā, ekaṃsabyākaraṇayoggāti attho. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ṭhapanīyāti ṭhapetabbattā abyākaraṇīyāti attho. Samayantaraparicayena nivāraṇadhammaṃ pati saṃsayapakkhando pucchatīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘vimaticchedana’’nti. Pakatiyā pana nivāraṇadhammaṃ ajānanto ñātukāmatāya pucchatīti adiṭṭhajotanāya pucchāpi siyā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘lokassa nivāraṇādīni ajānantenā’’ti.
“一事物摄”(ekavatthupariggahā),即因执取、把握单一所表之义。显示巴利原文
Ekavatthupariggahāti ekassa abhidheyyatthassa gahaṇato.
令解脱成熟的诸根,是指安住于还灭分(vivaṭṭapakkha),即朝向涅槃这一方的信等诸善法。然而,此处有人问:圣者们是否也归属于这“根的世间”呢?因此答道:“以所摄法的力量”等。显示巴利原文
Vimuttiparipācakaindriyāni vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitassa saddhādayo dhammā, kiṃ panettha ariyānampi indriyalokena saṅgaho hotīti āha ‘‘pariyāpannadhammavasenā’’tiādi.
以黑半月的第十四日、稠密的森林丛、云层般的遮蔽以及夜半——这四支具足的比喻来说明。“vivicchā”即“疑”(vicikicchā),因此说它是“疑之因”。在“苦为其大恐怖”这一句中,“assa”一词,应与“渴爱的黏着,我说为‘assa’”相连接来理解,所以解释道:“渴爱即是此世间的‘assa’。”接着,“以一切众生”等说明、“以一切漏”等说明,分别从顺向与逆向两条路径,显示出无明特别能成为障碍的性质。而“远方诸善人得以显耀”(《法句》304;《义释》11)与“染著者不明了意义”(《义释》11,27)这两首偈颂,则是用来展示随颂观察——应如此连接理解。显示巴利原文
Kāḷapakkhacātuddasīghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalacchādanaaḍḍharattīnaṃ vasena caturaṅgasamannāgatena. Vivicchāti vicikicchāya. Tenāha ‘‘vicikicchāhetū’’ti. Dukkhamassa mahabbhayanti ettha vuttaṃ ‘‘assā’’ti padaṃ ‘‘jappābhilepanaṃ assa brūmī’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbanti dassento ‘‘jappā taṇhā assa lokassā’’ti āha. ‘‘Sabbasattāna’’ntiādinā, ‘‘sabbasovā’’tiādinā ca anvayato, byatirekato ca sātisayaṃ avijjāya nīvaraṇabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Dūre santo pakāsanti (dha. pa. 304; netti. 11), ratto atthaṃ na jānātī’’ti (netti. 11, 27) gāthādvayenāpi anugītivicayaṃ dassetīti yojetabbaṃ.
“色有境”(rūpāvacarā)是指色界众生。这是说明从变坏苦(vipariṇāmadukkhatā)中解脱的原因之语,应如此连接理解。所谓解脱,即是从轮回之苦中解脱;而这轮回之苦,正是由以无余穷尽的方式所把握的行苦(saṅkhāradukkhatā)所代表的。显示巴利原文
Rūpāvacarāti rūpāvacarasattā. Vipariṇāmadukkhatāya muccanassa kāraṇavacananti sambandho. Yato vaṭṭadukkhato muccanaṃ. Taṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ anavasesapariyādānavasena saṅkhāradukkhatāgahaṇena.
“一依(ekādhāra)”,即单一事物的依止。因其所问涉及障碍、镇伏、遮蔽、断这两种含义,故论中说“显示多依”。故云:“作为障碍的抑制(nivāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṃvaraṃ)……被遮蔽、被斩断”(《相应部注》、《小部注》)。其含义是:“请讲说作为障碍的镇伏、抑制与遮蔽”。显示巴利原文
Ekādhāranti ekavatthu adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Nivāraṇaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ pidhānaṃ samucchedoti atthadvayassa pucchitattā ‘‘anekādhāraṃ dassetu’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nivāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṃvaraṃ…pe… pidhiyyanti pacchijjantī’’ti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.1041; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 3). Tassattho ‘‘nivāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ, saṃvaraṃ, pidhānañca kathehī’’ti.
“vodāna”(清净)一词意指对诸流的镇伏清净(vikkhambhanavisuddhi);“vuṭṭhāna”(出起)一词意指断清净(samucchedavisuddhi)。因此,为阐明提问所涉的双重含义,才说“eva”等语。同样地,也有这样的说法:“清净……乃至……圣道。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Vodāna’’nti iminā sotānaṃ vikkhambhanavisuddhi, ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti iminā samucchedavisuddhi adhippetāti āha ‘‘pucchāya duvidhatthavisayataṃ vivarituṃ ‘eva’ntiādi vutta’’nti. Tathā cāha ‘‘vodāyati…pe… ariyamaggo’’ti.
见之流、慢之流、无明之流亦随渴爱之流而行,故说“大部分是以随喜力”。“以近行力”,即依止的近行力。“从一切”,即从眼到意的一切感官之門。“以一切方式”,即以渴爱、邪执、高举等方式。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhimānāvijjāsotāpi taṇhāsotānugāti āha ‘‘yebhuyyena anurodhavasenā’’ti. Upacāravasenāti nissitupacāravasena. Sabbasmāti cakkhuto yāva manatoti sabbasmā dvārato. Sabbappakārenātti taṇhāyanamicchābhinivesanaunnamanādippakārena.
「即是那念」的意思:在道的前行阶段,为镇伏诸流而说的那种念,就是这一念。在道刹那,我称此为诸流的防护与关闭。然而,由于在道刹那,能关闭的念也随顺于慧,而此处慧的作用更为殊胜,因此说「他们由慧而关闭」。显示巴利原文
Tameva satinti yāyaṃ sati pubbabhāge sotānaṃ vikkhambhanavasena vuttā, tameva satiṃ. Maggakkhaṇe sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ pidhānaṃ brūmi. Yasmā pana pidhāyikāpi sati maggakkhaṇe paññānugā, paññākiccamevettha adhikaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti.
于「防护与关闭」中,「防护」一词是指制止。显示巴利原文
Saṃvarapidhānānanti ettha saṃvarasaddena nivāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.
于任何尚未证得的圣道中,可能生起的有行识,一旦证得该道,便连同其相应的名色一起,以不再生起的方式灭尽。因此经中说:「由于彼彼识的灭尽,所以与之俱……」这里的「灭」即「不生灭」,乃是就无余涅槃而言。依此而连结,故称为「连结」,此处所问的正是此义。显示巴利原文
Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ ariyamagge anadhigate yaṃ yaṃ abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ uppajjanārahaṃ, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ adhigate taṃ taṃ viññāṇaṃ anuppādanirodhena nirujjhati saddhiṃ attanā sampayuttanāmarūpenāti āha ‘‘tassa tassa viññāṇassa nirodhena sahevā’’ti. Anuppādanirodho hi ettha ‘‘nirodho’’ti adhippeto anupādisesanibbānassa adhippetattāti. Anusandhīyati etenāti anusandhi, idha pucchiyamāno attho.
所谓“与境一同显示”,此处的四谛就是“境”。具有“应断”性质的是集谛,它的境是苦谛。正如经中所说:“比丘们!若对结所系法住于随观乐味,渴爱便会增长。”(《相应部》)具有“能断”性质的是道谛,它的境是灭谛。因此说“与境一同……于诸谛中”。此处虽是以“集谛于二地中断”为开头,但只有“由见道断三结,由修道断七结”这样的分别说才适用,所以论中说“以能断的分别作为门径,来显示应断的分别”。显示巴利原文
Sahavisayena dassetunti ettha saccāni eva visayo. Pahātabbasabhāvaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, tassa visayo dukkhasaccaṃ. ‘‘Saṃyojaniyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino viharato taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.53, 57) hi vuttaṃ. Pahāyakasabhāvaṃ maggasaccaṃ, tassa visayo nirodhasaccanti āha ‘‘saha visayena…pe… saccesū’’ti. Kāmañcettha ‘‘samudayo dvīsu bhūmīsu pahīyatī’’ti āraddhaṃ, ‘‘dassanena tīṇi saṃyojanāni pahīyanti, bhāvanāya satta saṃyojanāni pahīyantī’’ti pana vibhāgavacanameva vattanti āha ‘‘pahāyakavibhāgamukhena pahātabbavibhāgaṃ dassetu’’nti.
无余的欲贪与嗔恚是由第三道断除的,其余诸结则由第四道断除,因此说“由其余道无余断除”。在那三界、三有的业与异熟轮转之中,这是就结的力量而说的,也就是一切时都有的连结力与束缚力。显示巴利原文
Niravasesakāmarāgabyāpādā tatiyamaggena pahīyanti, itare catutthamaggenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘itarehi pana niravasesa’’nti. Tatthāti kammavipākavaṭṭappabhedena tedhātuke bhavattaye. Saṃyojanavasenāti sabbadā yojanavasena bandhanavasena.
12 「喜悦」:虽然它只是一种智,但由于是最高的果智,其相是灭尽与不生起的所缘,因此从省察智的角度,以‘果’的惯称而获得两种名称。显示巴利原文
12. Aggaphalañāṇatāya ekampi samānaṃ tannimittassa khayānuppādārammaṇassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa vasena phalavohārena dve nāmāni labhati.
「喜悦」之得名,正是依此所缘的标示;为阐明此义,而说「于尽……指示……」。显示巴利原文
Somanassanāmalābho iminā ārammaṇasaṅketenāti tadatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘khaye…pe… samaññāyā’’ti āha.
13 「仅以彼摄」:指仅以触第五支与五色根而摄。「俱生等」:指以俱生、无间等缘力,以及依止、所缘等方式。「相应」:这里意指俱存、不异,故说「指无差别地可摄」。显示巴利原文
13.Taggahaṇenevāti phassapañcamakapañcarūpindriyaggahaṇeneva. Sahacaraṇādināti sahajātādianantarādipaccayabhāvena ceva nissayārammaṇādinā ca. ‘‘Sampayutta’’nti iminā sahitatā avisiṭṭhatā idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘avibhāgena gahaṇīyabhāvaṃ sandhāyā’’ti.
如何生起定根?他答道:「以念摄」在此处是指舍断缠(现行烦恼)。因为凭定是不可能断除缠的。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ samādhindriyaṃ uppādetīti āha ‘‘satiggahaṇena cettha pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ idhādhippeta’’nti. Na hi samādhinā pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ sambhavati.
“精进”:通过它而精进,故称为精进,即精进力。“那些”指精进行。“一味”:如同诸根是一味的,同样,以一味性而随念、转起。对于如此转起的善精进,“确实很好地运用了精进”,瑜伽行者应当这样思惟,因此以随顺运用精进的含义,称为“赞扬”。所以这样说:“于我如是……乃至……因性故。”显示巴利原文
Padahati etenāti padhānaṃ, vīriyaṃ. Teti vīriyasaṅkhārā. Ekarasenāti yathā indriyāni ekarasāni honti, evaṃ ekarasabhāvena saraṇato pavattanato. Tathā pavattiyā eva suṭṭhu vata vīriyaṃ vāhesīti yoginā saṅkappetabbato tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena ‘‘sampahaṃsanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ me…pe… hetubhāvato’’ti.
对于“神足”一词,第一种含义是主动义,第二种是工具义;而对于“足”一词,则只有工具义。所说的“应成就的神足”,并非“正在成就”。应成就的神足与作为成就工具的“足”并非同格关系,因此怎能说“依第一种含义,神足即是足”呢?同样,通过神通行之作而应证得的、称为智慧的成就,与通过成就业之作而应成就的,这两种工具义并不共格,因此怎能说“依第二种含义,以神足为足”呢?然而,这是可以的,因为“足”作为正在成就的部分,正是成就工具的方便。或者,作这样的联结:“依第一种含义,以神足为足;依第二种含义,神足即是足,即神足。”这是为何呢?在此,依近因之理,邻近义被理解为“第一种”,而更前之义则为“第二种”。显示巴利原文
Iddhisaddassa paṭhamo kattuattho, dutiyo karaṇattho vutto, pādasaddassa eko karaṇattho eva. Pajjitabbā ca iddhī vuttā, na ca ijjhanti. Pajjitabbā ca iddhī pajjanakaraṇena pādena samānādhikaraṇā na hontīti ‘‘paṭhamena atthena iddhi eva pādo’’ti kathaṃ sakkā vattuṃ, tathā iddhikiriyākaraṇena sādhetabbā buddhisaṅkhātā iddhi pajjanakiriyākaraṇena pajjitabbāti dvinnaṃ karaṇānaṃ na samānādhikaraṇatā sambhavatīti ‘‘dutiyena atthena iddhiyā pādo’’ti kathaṃ sakkā vattunti ce? Sakkā, pādassa ijjhamānakoṭṭhāsa ijjhanakaraṇūpāyabhāvato. Atha vā ‘‘paṭhamena atthena iddhiyā pādo, dutiyena atthena iddhi eva pādo iddhipādo’’ti evaṃ yojanato. Kathaṃ? Anantarattho paccāsattiñāyena idha paṭhamoti adhippeto, tato purimo dutiyoti.
依据“如果比丘以欲为增上而获得定……”等语,在“修习欲定精进神足”中,也是将“欲增上”与“定”合为“欲定”,省略了“增上”一词而构成复合词。其次,为显示“增上”一词的意义,在《破迷论》中说:“欲为因的、或欲增上的定。”因此,此处也应知“欲定”即“欲增上定”。为了说明该欲依前述方式以信为首,而说“信增上的心一境性”。或说“这是精进”,即精进力。与精进一词相应,用单数表述,而由于意指四种精进及应生起之法的区分,故说“这些行”。如是,应知复合词义为:作为精进的诸行,即精进行。此处取“精进”一词,是为了排除“有为行”等其他含义。或者,依各自特性而造作,故为行,即一切精进。其中,为排除四作用成就者之外的其他,而取“精进”一词,故义为精进所成、最胜所成。显示巴利原文
‘‘Chandaṃ ce bhikkhu adhipatiṃ karitvā labhati samādhi’’ntiādi (vibha. 432) vacanato chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvetīti etthāpi chandādhipati samādhi chandasamādhīti adhipatisaddalopaṃ katvā samāso vuttoti viññāyati. Adhipatisaddatthadassanavaseneva pana ‘‘chandahetuko, chandādhiko vā samādhī’’ti sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 431) vuttaṃ, tasmā idhāpi chandādhipati samādhi chandasamādhīti veditabbo. Taṃ pana chandaṃ vuttanayena saddhāsīsena dassento ‘‘saddhādhipateyyā cittekaggatā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ padhāna’’nti vā vīriyaṃ vuttaṃ. Vīriyasaddāpekkhāsahitaṃ ekavacanena vatvā catubbidhassapi vīriyassa adhippetattā nibbattetabbadhammavibhāgena ca ‘‘ime saṅkhārā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena padhānabhūtā saṅkhārāti evaṃ samāso veditabbo. Saṅkhatasaṅkhārādinivattanatthañcettha padhānaggahaṇaṃ. Atha vā taṃ taṃ visesaṃ saṅkharotīti saṅkhāro, sabbampi vīriyaṃ. Tattha catukiccasādhakato aññassa nivattanatthaṃ padhānaggahaṇanti padhānabhūtā seṭṭhabhūtāti attho.
在精进神足的解说中,“精进定精进行具足”(《分别论》435)一句,出现了两处“精进”。其中,前者是定的差别——即以精进为增上的定,称为精进定;后者则是为了显示具足之因。因为各处所说的具足因其实只有两种:定与精进行。欲等只是定的差别。精进行仅由“精进”一词而得差别,非由欲等,所以这里并没有说精进行是以精进为增上。精进作为定的差别而独立存在,复以具足之因的方式,由“精进行”一语加以说明,并非以两种精进来表示具足。然而,由于由欲等所差别的定,以及与之相应的精进行和其余诸法,也随之而差别,故依诸定差别的不同,说为“四种神足”。欲等的差别,是依各自作为所依的方式而成立的,因此在“欲定精进行神足”等表述中,以“足”字表示“方法”的同时,也含有“所依”之义,由此说欲等为神足。正如在阿毗达摩《后细论品》中,通过“四神足:欲神足……”(《分别论》457)等,直接将欲等说为神足。在《问论者》中,虽以“四神足——于此,比丘修习欲定……”(《分别论》462)为开端,但也只是再将欲等区分为善等。正是为了显示作为方法的神足,才显示了作为所依的神足。显示巴利原文
Vīriyiddhipādaniddese ‘‘vīriyasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgata’’nti (vibha. 435) dvikkhattuṃ vīriyaṃ āgataṃ. Tattha purimaṃ samādhivisesanaṃ ‘‘vīriyādhipati samādhi vīriyasamādhī’’ti, dutiyaṃ samannāgamaṅgadassanatthaṃ. Dve eva hi sabbattha samannāgamaṅgāni samādhi, padhānasaṅkhāro ca. Chandādayo samādhivisesanāni. Padhānasaṅkhāro pana padhānavacaneneva visesito, na chandādīhīti na idha vīriyādhipatitā padhānasaṅkhārassa vuttā hoti. Vīriyañca samādhiṃ visesetvā ṭhitameva samannāgamaṅgavasena padhānasaṅkhāravacanena vuttanti nāpi dvīhi vīriyehi samannāgamo vutto hoti. Yasmā pana chandādīhi visiṭṭho samādhi tathā visiṭṭheneva tena sampayutto padhānasaṅkhāro, sesadhammā ca, tasmā samādhivisesanānaṃ vasena ‘‘cattāro iddhipādā’’ti vuttā. Visesanabhāvo ca chandādīnaṃ taṃtaṃapassayanavasena hotīti chandasamādhi…pe… iddhipādanti ettha nissayatthepi pādasaddena upāyatthena chandādīnaṃ iddhipādatā vuttā hoti. Tathā hi abhidhamme uttaracūḷabhājanīye ‘‘cattāro iddhipādā chandiddhipādo’’tiādinā (vibha. 457) chandādīnameva iddhipādatā vuttā. Pañhāpucchake ca ‘‘cattāro iddhipādā – idha bhikkhu chandasamādhī’’ti (vibha. 462) ārabhitvāpi puna chandādīnaṃyeva kusalādibhāvo vibhatto. Upāyiddhipādadassanatthameva hi nissayiddhipādadassanaṃ kataṃ. Aññathā catubbidhatāva na hotīti. Ayamettha pāḷivasena atthavinicchayo veditabbo.
在说明了依彼分断、依正断、依出离远离之后,并未提及依止息远离,这是因为所应修习的神足,已于“修习欲定……神足”(《分别论》432)这段叙述中被说及。因为已经修习神足的人,所应当现证的,正是含摄在果位中的神足。显示巴利原文
Tadaṅgasamucchedanissaraṇavivekanissitattaṃ vatvā paṭippassaddhivivekanissitassa avacanaṃ ‘‘chandasamādhi…pe… iddhipādaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (vibha. 432) bhāvetabbānaṃ iddhipādānaṃ vuttattā. Bhāvitiddhipādassa hi sacchikātabbā phalapariyāpannā iddhipādāti.
“舍离”一词含有“舍弃”与“投入”二义,故说舍离有两类。所谓“如前所述的方式”,即是指以彼分断与正断的方式,以及以倾向彼、以彼为所缘的方式。而“转变之时”,则是指观的刹那。显示巴利原文
Vossaggasaddo pariccāgattho, pakkhandanattho cāti vossaggassa duvidhatā vuttā. Yathāvuttena pakārenāti tadaṅgasamucchedappakārena, tanninnabhāvārammaṇappakārena ca. Pariṇamantaṃ vipassanakkhaṇe.
14 “前分慧”:指在单一转向或多重转向的心路中所转起的近行慧。“证得慧”:指安止定之慧。再次出现的“前分慧”:指多重转向的近行慧,或结生慧。“近行慧”:指于单一转向中,或在一切处所转起的近行慧。显示巴利原文
14.Pubbabhāgapaññāyāti ekāvajjananānāvajjanavīthīsu pavattaupacārapaññāya. Adhigamapaññāyāti appanāpaññāya. Puna pubbabhāgapaññāyāti nānāvajjanupacārapaññāya, paṭisandhipaññāya vā. Upacārapaññāyāti ekāvajjane, sabbattha vā pavattaupacārapaññāya.
“问、答、简择”:即如前所述的问、答与简择。“依已说之理”:即随顺前文所说“指示未见、断除疑惑”之理。显示巴利原文
Pucchāvissajjanavicayopīti yathāvuttāya pucchāya vissajjanavicayopi. Vuttanayānusārenāti adiṭṭhajotanā, vimaticchedanā cāti heṭṭhā vuttanayānugamanena.
15 “有学”:指有学圣者。“无学”:指无学圣者。“观为前导的断”:即先以观为前导,而后生起的烦恼之断,也就是“断现观”之义。显示巴利原文
15.Sekheasekheti sekkhe ariyapuggale, asekkhe ariyapuggale. Vipassanāpubbaṅgamappahāneti vipassanaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā pavattakilesappahāne, pahānābhisamayeti attho.
在显示了“凡是无常、苦、无我”的原文之后,又提到“凡是在无常、苦、无我中”,这是為了说明,此处应如此读诵或理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti pāḷiṃ dassetvā puna ‘‘yaṃ anicce dukkhe anattanī’’ti vacanaṃ evampettha paṭhantīti dassetuṃ.
“其余的染污法及清净法”:指从贪著所剩余的染污法,以及一切清净法。“以无有”:即通过不存在,通过令其不存在。显示巴利原文
Sesasaṃkilesavodānadhammāti gedhato avasiṭṭhasaṃkilesadhammā ca sabbavodānadhammā ca. Abhāvenāti abhāvanena abhāvakaraṇena.
“精勤加行”:“强力地專注”称为加行,加行本身即是精勤,故名为“精勤加行”,此指心。“向上抛起”:即不令心落入懈怠那一边,如同将其向上抛起,使之在善法那一边运转。“精进”:为令不善法不再生起的最上精进。“应被运用的”:当以“修习、策励”等方式來运用。“未生”的:即已落入不可言说的状态,指那些已经获得地位、已经取得所缘、已经证得、已经被镇伏、已经被断除而不再生起的法。显示巴利原文
Payogaparakkamanti bhusaṃ yogo payogo, payogova parakkamo payogaparakkamo, cittaṃ. Ukkhipatīti kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adento kusalapakkhe uddhaṃ khipento viya pavattati. Padhānavīriyanti akusalānaṃ anuppādanaṭṭhena uttamavīriyaṃ. Yojetabbānīti ‘‘āsevamāno vāyamatī’’tiādinā yojetabbāni. Anuppannāti avattabbataṃ āpannānanti bhūmiladdhārammaṇādhiggahitāvikkhambhitāsamugghāṭituppannānaṃ.
16 由于经中说“第八人的诸根”,因此说“初道中的信等”。应知经中提及“根”,仅为举例而已。显示巴利原文
16. ‘‘Aṭṭhamakassa indriyānī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘paṭhamamagge saddhādayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Indriyaggahaṇañca pāḷiyaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“不净随观”即是“身随观念处”,故说“以修习念处而善调伏了欲寻”。为了表明现起的“定”也是在调伏“欲寻”后才生起的,所以说了“以无过失之乐为近因”等语。通过“于诸善法勤精进”等语句,说明由“法欲”而生的“精进欲”能增长“忍耐”。同样,如同修习那些有助于无过失法的法,舍弃那些没有帮助的法,也是通过修习“慧”来达成的,因此说了“对定等”等内容。显示巴利原文
Asubhānupassanā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya suniggahito kāmavitakko’’ti. Samādhi uppajjamāno kāmavitakkampi niggahetvā eva uppajjatīti dassento ‘‘anavajjasukhapadaṭṭhānenā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Kusalesu dhammesu āraddhavīriyo’’tiādinā dhammacchandato uppajjamāno vīriyacchando khantiṃ paribrūhetīti dasseti. Anavajjadhammānaṃ upakārakadhammāsevanaṃ viya anupakārakadhammaparivajjanampi paññānisevaneneva hotīti āha ‘‘samādhiādīna’’ntiādi.
17 为了把以“一切法”为立足点的教说,用“补特伽罗”为立足点的方式来分析,所以说了“所谓世间”等语。为显示此理,而说“显示一切法……”。在广大法中,“住”即是成就他们状态。其余情况亦然。“正在增长时”:即当这些法被宣说,令解脱趋于成熟之际。显示巴利原文
17. Sabbadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ desanaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena vibhajituṃ ‘‘loko nāmā’’tiādi vuttanti dassento ‘‘sabbadhammānanti…pe… dassetu’’nti āha. Mahaggatadhammesu ṭhānaṃ taṃsampādanāva. Tathā sesesu. Vaḍḍhiyamānesūti yathā vimuttiṃ paripācayanti, evaṃ brūhiyamānesu.
‘见遍知’:指对色法与无色法,从各自的自相、以缘的角度作彻底了解。因此,它被称为‘了知遍知’。与破除违逆烦恼相伴而阐明三相,这里便意许为‘修习遍知’,所以说‘修习……遍知’这段文。或者也可这样领会其义:为见而起的遍知名‘见遍知’,为修习而起的遍知名‘修习遍知’。显示巴利原文
Dassanapariññāti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ salakkhaṇato, paccayato ca parijānanā. Tenāha ‘‘ñātapariññā’’ti. Paṭipakkhavidhamanena saddhiṃ lakkhaṇattayavibhāvanā idha ‘‘bhāvanāpariññā’’ti adhippetāti āha ‘‘bhāvanā…pe… pariññā cā’’ti . Dassanatthā pariññā dassanapariññā, bhāvanatthā pariññā bhāvanāpariññāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
‘粗触等’:即粗等之触等。‘自证后’:指以证智、以慧了知之后;或对于安住者,以证知为因——这是它的含义。‘义’:即果。‘理’:即所说之理趣。显示巴利原文
Kakkhaḷaphusanādīti kakkhaḷādiphusanādi. Abhijānitvāti abhiññāya paññāya jānitvā, ṭhitassa abhijānanahetu vāti attho. Atthoti phalaṃ. Nayoti vuttanayo.
‘凡是无为’也是某些人所读诵。‘四理通达者’:即精通一性、异性等四种理趣者。‘于教说之适宜善巧者’:即善巧于诸法教说方式者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ asaṅkhata’’ntipi paṭhanti. Catunayakovidoti ekattanānattādinayacatukke nipuṇo. Desanāyuttikusaloti dhammānaṃ desanāvidhimhi kusalo.
“应使其相似,即依会通”:这是它的意思。应这样引出:“此教说与彼教说如此会通”。义理上脱离,即不相应之义。无关联义,即互相无关联的句义。难道“发趣的思择”不像“理的思择”那样,是不混杂其他理趣的另一种思择吗?考虑到这一质难,因此说“然而因为”等。“此处所放置的”:即在此经抉择中,由于是对经义的思择,故而放置;或者应知,这是为了显示发趣如同根本句一样,其句义无差别,即包含在发趣的转趣之中。显示巴利原文
Sadisī kātabbā saṃsandanavasenāti adhippāyo. Ānetabbā ‘‘ayaṃ desanā imāya desanāya evaṃ saṃsandatī’’ti. Atthato apetanti ayuttatthaṃ. Asambandhatthanti aññamaññaṃ asambandhapadatthaṃ. Nanu paṭṭhānavicāro nayavicāro viya hārehi asammisso vicāraṇantaroti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Idha nikkhittoti idha suttavicaye suttatthavicārabhāvato nikkhitto, etena vā paṭṭhānassa hārantogadhabhāvadassaneneva mūlapadānaṃ viya paṭṭhānassa padatthantarābhāvo dassitoti veditabbaṃ.
“此经”:指正在被注释的经。“于何句”:指正在被注释的偈颂。“由彼抉择”:即由提问等抉择,以及由味等抉择。显示巴利原文
Imassa suttassāti saṃvaṇṇiyamānasuttaṃ sandhāyāha. Kasmiṃ vā padeti saṃvaṇṇiyamānaṃ gāthaṃ sandhāyāha. Tabbicayenāti pucchādivicayena, assādādivicayena ca.
3. 合理转趣分别的注释显示巴利原文
3. Yuttihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
18 “此经之义不应如是取,而应如是取”:为了对不应取与应取之义作出舍离与执取,在审查合理与不合理时,先就应舍弃者,指出其首先是现行,故说:“经义若以不如实的方式被执取,则其领域……”如“放左,取右”。因为经由经文之词辨明应舍弃性后,应取性才得以存留。因为他将这样说:“安住于慈者,嗔心将占据其心”——此教说不合理;“嗔已舍断,归于无有”——此教说合理。显示巴利原文
18. Evametassa suttassa attho na gahetabbo, evaṃ pana gahetabboti aggahetabbagahetabbānaṃ atthānaṃ vijahanaggahaṇatthāya yuttāyuttivicāraṇāyaṃ vajjetabbesu tāva paṭhamaṃ paṭipattīti dassento āha ‘‘atathākārena gayhamānā suttatthā visayo’’ti yathā ‘‘vāmaṃ muñca, dakkhiṇaṃ gaṇhā’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 498; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.14; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.213). Vajjetabbabhāvato hi suttapadehi suttatthe vivecite gahetabbabhāvo ca avasiṭṭho hoti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘mettāvihārassa sato byāpādo cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatī’ti na yujjati desanā, ‘byāpādo pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatī’ti yujjati desanā’’ti (netti. 21).
通过引出理则,排除了不如实的,为了说明如实执取法的原因,而说「大教法:这些应被大人物所指示,故为大教法」,他以此义而说「佛陀等」。「依止处」:即安立之因。在其他中:即在僧教法等中。因为此处确实只出现了第一种义,其意为:大教法是决断之因。「引经等」:由「等」字亦包含引经之随行。因为引经与引经之随行的显示,是对于某人如其所受持之典籍,作为决断「是法」之因;引经与引经之随行不显示,则是决断「非法」之因。「若是如此」:即若如其所受持之典籍,与经律会通为「法」,不会通为「非法」,作为决断之因,其意即「若是如此」。法由这些被充分了知,故为sampadā,即宣说者。显示巴利原文
Yuttiniddhāraṇena ayathāsabhāvato vivecitvā yathāsabhāvato dhammassa gahaṇakāraṇāni kathento ‘‘mahantā apadisitabbā etesanti mahāpadesā’’ti imamatthamāha ‘‘buddhādayo’’tiādinā. Patiṭṭhānānīti patiṭṭhānasādhanāni. Sesesūti saṅghāpadesādīsu. Paṭhamattho eva hi idha pāḷi āgato, vinicchayane kāraṇaṃ mahāpadesoti adhippāyo. Suttotaraṇādīti ādisaddena suttānotaraṇādipi saṅgayhati. Suttotaraṇavinayasandassanāni hi kenaci yathābhatassa ganthassa ‘‘dhammo’’ti vinicchayane kāraṇaṃ. Suttānotaraṇavinayāsandassanāni ‘‘adhammo’’ti. Yadi evanti yadi yathābhatassa ganthassa suttavinayehi saṃsandanaṃ ‘‘dhammo’’ti, asaṃsandanaṃ ‘‘adhammo’’ti vinicchayakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ santeti attho. Sampadīyati ñāpīyati dhammo etehīti sampadāyā, akkhātāro.
贪等由此被调伏,故为vinayo(律),即因。故他说:「即调伏贪等之相」。那又是什么?即具有决定性的止观等法。这些即是后面他处将说的「四十三菩提分法」。显示巴利原文
Vinīyanti rāgādayo etenāti vinayo, kāraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘rāgādivūpasamanimitta’’nti. Kiṃ pana taṃ? Sādhiṭṭhānasamathavipassanādidhammā. Ye parato ‘‘tecattālīsaṃ bodhaṅgamā dhammā’’ti (netti. 24) vakkhati.
律大教法是随顺适宜的,故名为「随顺适宜」;经大教法因与之相似,在注释的用语中,也被称为「随顺适宜」。故说:「所谓随顺适宜者」。显示巴利原文
Vinayamahāpadesā kappiyānulomato anulomakappiyaṃ nāma, taṃsadisatāya suttantamahāpadesāpi anulomakappiyanti aṭṭhakathāvohāro. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ anulomakappiyanti vuccatī’’ti.
虽然世尊在各处开示的零散教说本身即是注释,但结集法者将三藏佛语结集后,按照解释其义的方式安立了读诵途径,因此名为‘师说’。故说‘师说即是注释’。事实上,三次结集所传下的佛语注释途径,后来由铜鍱洲的大长老们以僧伽罗语确立。‘自意’指长老说。‘应取其相合者’——这是表明:应如同与经文会通那样,从大教法中引出其义。为了说明师说有时因读诵途径的错误而与经文不相对应,这种则不应取,所以说‘唯与经相合者方可取’。显示巴利原文
Yadipi tattha tattha pavattā bhagavato pakiṇṇakadesanā aṭṭhakathā, sā pana dhammasaṅgāhakehi tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ saṅgāyitvā tassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanānurūpena vācanāmaggaṃ āropitattā ācariyavādo nāma. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ācariyavādo nāma aṭṭhakathā’’ti. Tissopi saṅgītiyo āruḷho eva hi buddhavacanassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhūto kathāmaggo pacchā tambapaṇṇiyehi mahātherehi sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapito. Attanomati theravādo. Samentameva gahetabbanti yathā pāḷiyā saṃsandati , evaṃ mahāpadesato atthā uddharitabbāti dasseti. Pamādapāṭhavasena ācariyavādassa kadāci pāḷiyā asaṃsandanāpi siyā, so na gahetabboti dassento āha – ‘‘suttena samento eva gahetabbo’’ti.
‘与四大教示相符’意为不与四大教示相违。现在,为了显示那不相违的方式,而说‘以这个、以那个’等。在此,入经等正是原因所在。而由于它具有多方面性,所以说‘以种种方式’。正在注释某部经时,应依注释来把握——这是关联。‘所持来者’指被引来的文句。‘从经’指从经藏中。在此,其意义是:由于某种机缘,从经藏中抽出并引来的经文句子,须通过入经等方式,以及种种原因的方式,在不违背四大教示的情况下,对于所注释的经,依注释来把握其所产生的意义。因此他说‘由此……乃至……应作’。其中,‘应作理趣之运用’是指通过理趣的抉择,应运用此理趣。或者说,‘应作理趣之运用’是指依此理趣,以将说的方法寻求合理性,再以那合理性运用一切理趣——这是其意义。因为,这理趣正是寻求合理性的特征。因此他说:‘一切理趣的基地与行境,在于合理与不合理的审察’(《导论》4),以及‘依此合理性,应以种种相互关联的理由来寻求’(《导论》20)。显示巴利原文
Catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjatīti catūhi mahāpadesehi na virujjhati. Idāni taṃ avirujjhanākāraṃ dassento ‘‘yena yenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Suttotaraṇādi eva hettha kāraṇaṃ. Tassa ca anekākāratāya ‘‘pakārenā’’ti vutto. Saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte saṃvaṇṇanāvasena gahetabbanti sambandho. Ābhatenāti ānītena. Suttatoti suttantarato. Ayañhettha attho – kenaci pasaṅgena suttantarato uddharitvā ānītena suttapadena suttotaraṇādinā, kāraṇappakārena ca catumahāpadesāvirodhena saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte saṃvaṇṇanāvasena atthajātaṃ gahetabbanti. Tenāha ‘‘tena…pe… kātabbā’’ti. Tattha yuttihārayojanā kātabbāti yuttiniddhāraṇavasena ayaṃ yuttihāro yojetabbo. Atha vā yuttihārayojanā kātabbāti iminā hārena vakkhamānanayena yuttigavesanaṃ katvā tāya yuttiyā sabbahārayojanā kātabbāti attho. Lakkhaṇañhetaṃ yuttigavesanāya, yadidaṃ yuttihāro. Tenāha ‘‘sabbesaṃ hārānaṃ, yā bhūmī, yo ca gocaro tesaṃ. ‘‘Yuttāyuttaparikkhā’’ti (netti. 4), ‘‘imāya yuttiyā aññamaññehi kāraṇehi gavesitabba’’nti (netti. 20) ca.
19 或者,也可以这样连接:如果所有文句都在表达同一意义。显示巴利原文
19. Yadi vā sabbāni padāni ekaṃ atthaṃ abhivadantīti yojanā.
20 “住立者的变异性”:对于已住立者,那变异性、那成为他样的状态,这便称为老。刹那死是刹那灭。断灭死是漏尽者的蕴般涅槃。显示巴利原文
20.Jarāyaṃ ṭhitassa aññathattanti ṭhitassa yaṃ aññathattaṃ aññathābhāvo, ayaṃ jarā nāma. Khaṇikamaraṇaṃ khaṇikanirodho. Samucchedamaraṇaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ khandhaparinibbānaṃ.
“纯粹的”:指不混杂老。老是一回事,死是另一回事;理由是“因为见到了所承认的纯粹之死”。如同“那些诸天……”是相似的例证,而神足等则是不相似的例证,应把握随顺与相违来结合。显示巴利原文
Kevalassāti jarāya amissassa. Aññāva jarā, aññaṃ maraṇanti ‘‘paṭiññātassa kevalassa maraṇassa diṭṭhattā’’ti hetu. Yathā taṃ devānanti sadisūdāharaṇaṃ, visadisūdāharaṇaṃ pana iddhipādādayo, anvayabyatirekā gahetvā yojetabbā.
“Tehi”:意为“以老死”。显示巴利原文
Tehīti jarāmaraṇehi.
“以坏灭碎裂为本质”——以此方式,将渴爱、老、死统合为不异。虽然“渴爱是一回事,老是另一回事,死又是另一回事”这一意义已然成立,且对此也说过“非此……”等,但为了揭示可能被遮遣的质难中所存在的过失,他引用“如果与老死相似……”等巴利文句,并说:“如果……显示……”。“存在”指意图。“这些”指这些渴爱、老、死。显示巴利原文
‘‘Jīraṇabhijjanasabhāvā’’ti iminā lesena taṇhājarāmaraṇānaṃ anaññattaṃ yojeti. Yadipi ‘‘aññā taṇhā, aññā jarā, aññaṃ maraṇa’’nti siddhovāyamattho, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘na ida’’ntiādi, tathāpi sakkuṇeyyaparihārāyaṃ codanāti ajjhāruḷhaṃ tattha dosaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yadi ca yathā jarāmaraṇa’’nti pāḷipavattāni dassento ‘‘yadi…pe… dassetī’’ti āha. Bhāvoti adhippāyo. Etesanti taṇhājarāmaraṇānaṃ.
“依此合理性,应以种种互相关联的理由来寻求”——也有一些人这样诵读,其意图是:也应从句读方面去寻求,即在其他地方从义理上另有所指。为了显示从句读上另有所指的意义,巴利语中说“如箭……”等。“这些”指这些箭、熏烟等。“欲的颠倒”指在所求不得时,或与不满相聚时。这也成为一项论证,因为它显示了所认定的他义相违。“老死的颠倒”指当老死不存在时。因为,在所认定的老死不存在时,渴爱并非就不存在。显示巴利原文
‘‘Imāya yuttiyā aññamaññehi kāraṇehi gavesitabba’’nti ca keci paṭhanti, byañjanatopi gavesitabbaṃ, aññattha atthato aññatthampīti adhippāyo. Tameva byañjanato aññatthaṃ dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘salloti vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imesanti salladhūpāyanānaṃ. Icchāvipariyāyeti icchitālābhe, appaccayasamavāye vā. Idampi samatthanaṃ hoti yathādhippetassa aññatthassa byatirekadassanabhāvato. Jarāmaraṇavipariyāyeti jarāmaraṇe asati. Na hi yathādhippetajarāmaraṇābhāve taṇhā na hotīti.
“以两种方式说”:即依两种类别而说,或说了两次。应知:“此……通过作为所缘或称呼的方式”——如此,应结合对作用的把握来理解。“特相”是指这些欲与渴爱的本性所构成的特殊相。巴利语中也有“以两名”之说。即使如此,其意义也是:欲与渴爱,依各自不同的对象及如上所说的状态差别,确实有某种程度的区分。但为了显示从本质上说并无差别,便说:“虽如此……”。显示巴利原文
Dvidhā vuttāti dvippakārena vuttā, dvikkhattuṃ vā vuttā. Yaṃ idaṃ…pe… ārammaṇakaraṇavasena vā abhilapananti evaṃ kiriyāparāmasanaṃ yojetabbanti veditabbaṃ. Visesoti ayaṃ etāsaṃ icchātaṇhānaṃ pakatisaṅkhāto viseso. ‘‘Dvīhi nāmehī’’tipi pāḷi. Yadipi evanti kāmaṃ visayavisesesu evaṃ yathāvuttaavatthāvisesena icchātaṇhānaṃ atthi kāci bhedamattāti attho. Sabhāvato pana bhedo natthīti dassento ‘‘tathāpī’’ti āha.
"Icchantī"意为"欲求",即那些贪爱。"Taṇhāyanā"是想要显现、想要成为可见的状态。"以灼烧之义",即遍烧的状况。"以拖曳之义",即拉取、攫取的意义。"流动的"指因贪欲而湿润、黏着。因与彼相应的喜,而成为润滑、涂油的。"Visattikā"(渴爱)指已展开,遍满于色等三界诸法的状态。"Visaṭā"是前述词的同义词,将ta音变为ṭa而说。"Visālā"指广阔、宽广。"Visakkatī"指行进、有能力忍受。因为染著者即使被贪染对象用脚踢打,也能忍受。也有人说"退却、悸动或散布"是"visakkana"。将无常等执为常等,它便成了欺诳的。"Visaṃharatī"指收拢:它显示诸欲中的种种功德,以种种行相将心从朝向出离的状态中收拢、聚集。或者说,"visa"是苦,它带走、运载此苦,这是它的意义。因为它是能产生苦的业之因,所以叫作"毒根";或者,苦等感受是毒,以此为根,这叫"毒根";因为是苦的集,所以它的果是毒,这叫"毒果"。它所受用的正是色等诸苦本身,而非不死。显示巴利原文
Icchantīti kāmenti. Taṇhāyanā pātukāmatā. Santāpanaṭṭhenāti paridahanabhāvena. Ākaḍḍhanaṭṭhenāti avaharaṇaṭṭhena. Saritānīti rāgavasena allāni. Taṃsampayuttapītivasena siniddhāni sinehitāni. Visattikāti vitthatā rūpādīsu tebhūmakadhammesu byāpanavasena. Visaṭāti purimavevacanameva ta-kārassa ṭa-kāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Visālāti vipulā. Visakkatīti parisakkati sahati. Ratto hi rāgavatthunā pādena tāḷiyamānopi sahati. ‘‘Osakkanaṃ, vipphandanaṃ vā visakkana’’nti vadanti. Aniccādikaṃ niccādito gaṇhantī visaṃvādikā hoti. Visaṃharatīti tathā tathā kāmesu ānisaṃsaṃ dassentī vividhehi ākārehi nekkhammābhimukhappavattito cittaṃ saṃharati saṃkhipati. Visaṃ vā dukkhaṃ, taṃ harati, vahatīti attho. Dukkhanibbattakassa kammassa hetubhāvato visamūlā, visaṃ vā dukkhādibhedā vedanā mūlaṃ etāyāti visamūlā, dukkhasamudayattā visaṃ phalaṃ etissāti visaphalā. Rūpādidukkhasseva paribhogo etāya, na amatassāti visaparibhogā. Sabbattha niruttivasena padasiddhi veditabbā. Yo panettha padhāno attho, taṃ dassetuṃ puna ‘‘visatā vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「滋润」即生起爱的意思。「以束缚之义」即是「结」义。「以期望之义」即是「欲求」义。「以欢喜之义」即是「味著」义,或亦可说是「欢迎」义。显示巴利原文
Sinehanaṃ pemakaraṇaṃ. Bandhanaṭṭhenāti saṃyojanaṭṭhena. Āsīsanaṭṭhenāti icchanaṭṭhena. Abhinandanaṭṭhenāti assādanaṭṭhena, sampaṭicchanaṭṭhena vā.
21 「不喜」即是厌倦。「智厌离」指厌离观。又如「苦……」等句中,对诸行所说的道理已如前说——这是结合。显示巴利原文
21.Anabhiratīti ukkaṇṭhā. Ñāṇanibbidāti nibbidānupassanā. Yathā ca dukkhū…pe… cāresu yutti vuttāti yojanā.
有乐行道钝通、乐行道利通、乐行道等种种差别。若有人适合通过苦行道证得殊胜,却对他施行如同对乐行道当机者那样的说法,便不能带来殊胜,因此那样的说法并不恰当。为表明此义,圣典中说了“贪行者……”等。应当知道:对于贪行者,若未先为他开示诸欲的过患、瑕疵、染污以及出离的利益,而一开始就对他说观法,那是不会带来殊胜的,因为他的心尚未清净。为显示此义,巴利圣典中便说“观……说法”。同样地,正如圣典通过对“贪行者”等分类来说明说法之不恰当,在余下的文句中,虽然圣典没有明文说出“对瞋行者补特伽罗应说不净”等,但对于瞋行者等类别,也应依正理推知其义而加以说明。然而,为何要在理趣论中辨别那些不恰当的说法呢?为回应这一质问,经文说“在此……”等。其余的情形,在针对瞋行者等一一辨别、寻求不恰当的说法时,也是运用同样的方便。巴利语中亦有“随顺舍弃”,其意与此相同。显示巴利原文
Sukhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññā sukhāpaṭipadākhippābhiññā sukhāpaṭipadādayo. Yo dukkhāya paṭipadāya visesaṃ adhigantuṃ bhabbo, tassa sukhāpaṭipadāyogyassa viya kariyamānā dhammadesanā visesāvahā na hoti, tasmā sā na yuttāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘rāgacarito’’tiādinā. Rāgacaritassa tathā tathā kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ, okāraṃ, saṃkilesaṃ, nekkhamme ānisaṃsañca avibhāvetvā ādito vipassanākathāva kariyamānā na visesāvahā hoti āsayassa asodhitattāti etamatthaṃ dassento pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vipassanā…pe… desanā’’ti āhāti veditabbaṃ. Sesapadesupīti yathā ‘‘rāgacaritassā’’tiādinā rāgacaritakoṭṭhāsavasena pāḷiyaṃ desanāya ayutti vuttā, iminā nayena sesapadesupi dosacaritakoṭṭhāsādīsupi ‘‘dosacaritassa puggalassa asubhaṃ deseyyā’’tiādinā pāḷiyaṃ avuttopi yathāsambhavamattho niddhāretvā vattabbo. Kasmā pana yuttihāre ayuttiniddhāraṇā katāti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Sesesupi eseva nayoti sesesupi dosacaritādivasena niddhāritesu ayuttigavesanesu ayameva upāyo. Anulomappahāna’’ntipi pāḷi, so evattho.
通过“智所能及之地”,显示了理趣论所及的广大范围。为何它的范围如此广大?因为它是对道理的审察,而且所要解释的法具有种种理路精细等殊胜功德。为显示这一点,才问“此为何因?”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāvatikāñāṇassa bhūmī’’ti etena yuttihārassa mahāvisayataṃ dasseti. Kasmā panāyaṃ mahāvisayoti? Yuttivicārabhāvato, saṃvaṇṇetabbassa ca dhammassa nānānayanipuṇādiguṇavisesayogatoti dassento ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’ti āha.
“后部分”是指后面的部分。由于慈心住者的部分并未被省略,所以说“不相合”。因此说“具念”。这恰是由于前面所说的原因——因为它是对立的。显示巴利原文
Aparabhāgeti pacchābhāge. Mettāvihāribhāgassa aparihīnatāvacanato ayogo vutto. Tenāha ‘‘sato’’ti. Yathāvuttakāraṇato evāti paṭipakkhattā eva.
在断除时,对于被邪见所认定者,当他们由见到过患而对‘寻’生起厌离时,就连第二禅那的近行禅那法都不以寻为所缘,更何况第二禅那本身的法呢?正是基于这一用意,才说:‘此处“俱行”一词的意义,是作为所缘之用。’显示巴利原文
Pahānekaṭṭhabhāvato diṭṭhimaññitassa. Ādīnavadassanena vitakkaṃ jigucchantā dutiyajjhānassa āsannaupacārajjhānadhammāpi vitakkārammaṇā na honti, pageva dutiyajjhānadhammāti adhippāyenāha ‘‘ārammaṇakaraṇattho hettha sahagatasaddo’’ti.
如此,展示了依圣教审察合理与不合理的理趣网相之后,现在为了也依随顺圣教的推理来显示它,便从功德的方面分别过失,因此说‘然而这里’等。这句话的意义显而易见。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ yuttihāralakkhaṇaṃ āgamato yuttāyuttavicāraṃ dassetvā idāni āgamānugatāya yuttiyāpi taṃ dassetuṃ guṇamukhena dosavibhajanaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ uttānatthameva.
第4节:对“足处网”的分别注释显示巴利原文
4. Padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
22 “那些那些的”,意为毫无遗漏地全部涵摄,也就是经中所说的那些法,以及作为那些法之因的那些法,这一切都包含在内。为了显示‘对一切法的如实状态不能通达’这一含义,故说‘但是他在哪里呢’等。显示巴利原文
22.Tesaṃtesanti anavasesapariyādānaṃ, tena ye sutte vuttā ca dhammā, ye ca tesaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ, tesaṃ sabbesampīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sabbadhammayāthāvaasampaṭivedhoti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kattha pana so’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“应被喜爱之种类”是指具有可爱性质的东西。“邪行道”即放逸犯戒,或是错误的执取。杀生的思即使只生起一次,由于播撒了怨恨,也会成为嗔的生起因;放逸犯戒或邪执取哪怕只生起一次,也会成为痴的生起因——经中虽未明说,但依道理应当这样确定。为了说明这一点,说道:“嗔的……依此道理,应知其义。”“取总相”是取颜色、形状等总体之相;“取随形好”便是取随形好。因此说为“取总相与随形好”。这里所说的“相”,指男女之相;“随形好”指手、足、笑、言语等具体特征。触是其缘,故称“触缘性”;由此而生贪着,故称为“味”,即贪爱。显示巴利原文
Piyāyitabbajātiyanti pemanīyasabhāvaṃ. Micchāpaṭipadāti pamādāpatti, micchābhiniveso vā. Ekavāraṃ uppannāpi pāṇātipātacetanā verappasavanato dosassa, ekavāraṃ uppannāpi pamādāpatti, micchābhiniveso vā mohassa uppattikāraṇanti pāḷiyaṃ avuttampi nayato niddhāretabbanti dassento ‘‘dosassa…pe… imināva nayena attho veditabbo’’ti āha. Nimittatthaggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānaṃ, anubyañjanatthaggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ anubyañjananti ‘‘nimittānubyañjanaggahaṇalakkhaṇā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha nimittaṃ itthipurisanimittaṃ. Anubyañjanaṃ hatthapādahasitakathitādi. Phasso paccayo etissāti phassapaccayā, taṃbhāvo phassapaccayatā. Assādeti etāyāti assādo, taṇhā.
所缘即是应了知之法,故说“不误解所缘、通达其自性”。为显明此处所指的正确行道,而说“戒与定具足”。又或,在圣典中,通过一分特相观察的方式,或者通过贪行者所相应的颜色、气味的方式,先说“以取青瘀相、脓烂相为相的不净想”,接着又说“那是厌离的足处”。为显示厌离,而说“厌离”等。其中,由于会产生恐惧,为加以简别,特地说“以智”。如此转起,即是依厌离而转起。显示巴利原文
Vatthūni ñeyyadhammoti āha ‘‘vatthuavippaṭipatti visayasabhāvapaṭivedho’’ti. Idhādhippetaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlasamādhisampadāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Ekadesupalakkhaṇavasena, vaṇṇagandharāgisappāyavasena vā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vinīlakavipubbakaggahaṇalakkhaṇā asubhasaññā’’ti vatvā ‘‘tassā nibbidāpadaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ nibbidaṃ dassento ‘‘nibbidā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paritassanato visesetuṃ ‘‘ñāṇenā’’ti visesitaṃ. Tathā pavattanti nibbidanākārena pavattanaṃ.
毗提诃王之女鲁迦因如理地从水中浮现,其宿命智成为业自属智的因,而非由于亲近不善人;那位国王的将军阿拉塔之子则因不如理浮现,故情形不同。为显示此义,说:“此……当举例说明。”“信”是净信。“状态差别”是以相应诸法无浑浊为特征的阶段差别。“处所已至”指所达到的状态,即缘取三宝为境。以“身”等说法,显示在无状态差别时,仅自性成就即是足处。显示巴利原文
Yoniso ummujjantiyā videharañño dhītāya rucāya jātissarañāṇaṃ kammassakataññāṇassa kāraṇaṃ ahosi, na pana asappurisūpanissayato, ayoniso ummujjantassa tasseva rañño senāpatino alātassa bījakassa dāsassāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘imassa ca…pe… udāharitabbo’’ti āha. Soti pasādo. Avatthāvisesoti sampayuttadhammānaṃ anāvilabhāvalakkhito avatthābhedo. Āyatanagatoti ṭhānagato, ratanattayavisayoti attho. ‘‘Kāyo’’tiādinā avatthāvisesena vinā sabhāvasiddhameva padaṭṭhānaṃ dasseti.
此处,圣典中先前那些法已被确定为足处。为了显示这些法是哪些法的足处,应当了知“另一种理趣”等已开始说明。对味的作意被说成具有不如理作意的特征,应知这仅是举例;或者说,是为了显示大多数众生因贪而转起不如理作意,才如此说。再生本身就是再生缘,此状态即称为再生缘性,因此说“以再生有的状态”。“决定的状态”是指色等对于看等所缘的决定作用。“有的支分”即有的因;在第二种意义上,“支分”是指组成部分,或者也可将业轮作为因支来结合理解。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ ca ṭhāne pāḷiyaṃ pubbe yesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ niddhāritaṃ, te dhammā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānāni honti, te dassetuṃ ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādi āraddhanti veditabbaṃ. Assādamanasikāro ayonisomanasikāralakkhaṇo vutto nidassanamattaatthoti veditabbo, yebhuyyena sattānaṃ lobhavasena ayonisomanasikārā saṃvattantītti dassanatthaṃ vā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Upapatti eva opapaccayaṃ, tassa bhāvo opapaccayikanti āha ‘‘upapattibhavabhāvenā’’ti. Vavatthitabhāvoti vavatthitabhāvo rūpassa dassanādipaṭiniyatārammaṇakiccatā. Bhavassa aṅgānīti bhavassa kāraṇāni. Dutiye aṅgānīti avayavā, kammavaṭṭampi vā kāraṇaṅgabhāvena yojetabbaṃ.
“业处”是指通过修习而增长、扩展。“在那些之中”是指在知处非处等之中。如理亲近恭敬善友——即依靠这位善友而得以听闻一切法,与法相应的欢悦便生起,因此知处非处是知欢悦的足处。同样,由于具有那种解脱,正念便存在,解脱知见也就生起,因此那解脱就是它的足处——这一意义显而易见,所以说“前面……乃至……很容易理解”。“与摄持俱”是指与知遍知一起,因为知遍知是度遍知的摄持(基础)。其余部分容易理解。显示巴利原文
Kammaṭṭhānassāti bhāvanāya brūhanā vaḍḍhanā. Tesūti titthaññutādīsu. Kalyāṇamittassa sammadeva payirupāsanāyapīti taṃ nissāya laddhena sabbāya dhammassavanena dhammupasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ hotīti titthaññutā pītaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ yāya vimuttiyā sati vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ hotīti sā tassa padaṭṭhānanti ayamattho pākaṭoti āha ‘‘purimānaṃ…pe… suviññeyyo evā’’ti. Saha adhiṭṭhānenāti ñātapariññāya saddhiṃ. Ñātapariññā hi tīraṇapariññāya adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
5. 相方式分别的注释显示巴利原文
5. Lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
23 “问相方式的范围”:当有人问“那么,它的范围是什么呢?”时,回答是“具有同一相而未说出的法”。身随观一旦着手修习,受随观等便容易成就;借助此说,显示出受所摄的念等实际上也已被说到,因为它们作为念处具有同一相。身随观念处以信所摄持的精进、念、定、慧根作为成就的资粮,其他念处也是如此,故而如是说。此义在注释书(《导向》注51)后面还会出现。依此方法,在其他解说同一相之处,意义也应当了知。稍后的四阵列方式注释(《导向》注20)中还会提及。显示巴利原文
23.‘‘Lakkhaṇahārassa visayaṃ pucchatī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘ko pana tassa visayo’’ti vutte samānalakkhaṇā avuttadhammā. Kāyānupassanāya samāraddhāya vedanānupassanādayo sukheneva sijjhantīti tabbacanena vedanāgatāsatiādīnaṃ vuttabhāvo dassito satipaṭṭhānabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānassa saddhānuggahitāni vīriyasatisamādhipaññindriyāni sādhanaṃ, evaṃ itaresampīti katvā vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ attho aṭṭhakathāyameva (netti. aṭṭha. 51) parato āgamissati. Iminā nayena sesesupi ekalakkhaṇatāniddesesu attho veditabbo. Paratoti catubyūhahāravaṇṇanāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 20).
“不混杂”的意思是:受等也依止于此、结生于此,因此在修习身随观时,即使可能陷入对受等随观的执着,也不与之相混杂——这就是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Asammissatoti vedanādayopi ettha sitā ettha paṭisandhāti kāye vedanādianupassanāpasaṅgepi āpanne tadasammissatoti attho.
为了遮止对整体的执取、随假名奔逸、取着实质和固执不舍,而将身依肢节等一一分解,肢节等又依头发等分解,头发等再依四大种与所造色来析解,因此说“如此,于身不……”等。在分析如宫殿、城市这类集合体时,即便是探究组成部分的人,也会对整体产生执取。然而,有些人可能产生“名为城市者,真有某种实义”这样的随假名奔逸,所以在涉及对女人、男人等的假名奔逸时,便以城市作为譬喻。他看见女人或男人。可是,难道能以肉眼看见“男女”吗?确实不能,但依循“我看见女人”“我看见男人”这样的假名而生起,才说“他看见”。或者,以邪见而看的人,他所看到的并非色处,或者那个并非色处——这是一层意思。又或者,他所看到的,并非由头发等四大种与所造色聚合而成的那种所见,或所看到的并不像所说的那样——这是另一层意思。至于“不为见所见”,是指:凡是色处,或者被看作由头发等四大种与所造色聚合而成的那种所见,此人凭慧眼也不能如实见到——这就是它的意思。显示巴利原文
Avayavigāhasamaññātidhāvanasārādānābhinivesanisedhanatthaṃ kāyaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgehi, tāni ca kesādīhi, kesādike ca bhūtupādāyarūpehi vinibbhujituṃ ‘‘tathā na kāye’’tiādimāha. Pāsādādinagarāvayavasamūhe avayavivādinopi avayavigāhaṇaṃ karonti. Nagaraṃ nāma koci attho atthīti pana kesañci samaññātidhāvanaṃ siyāti itthipurisādisamaññātidhāvane nagaranidassanaṃ vuttaṃ. Añño koci sattādiko. Yaṃ passati itthiṃ, purisaṃ vā. Nanu cakkhunā itthipurisadassanaṃ natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi, ‘‘itthiṃ passāmi, purisaṃ passāmī’’ti pana pavattasamaññāvasena ‘‘yaṃ passatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Micchādassanena vā diṭṭhiyā yaṃ passati, na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ hoti, rūpāyatanaṃ vā taṃ na hotīti attho. Atha vā taṃ kosādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ diṭṭhaṃ na hoti, diṭṭhaṃ vā yathāvuttaṃ na hotīti attho. Yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passatīti yaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ, kesādibhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhātaṃ vā diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ paññācakkhunā bhūtato na passatīti attho.
“非他法随观”:即“非他自性随观”,意思是并非从不净等角度去观察别的相——这样说。显示巴利原文
Na aññadhammānupassīti na aññasabhāvānupassī, asubhādito aññākārānupassī na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
所谓“地身”:因头发等是地大种法的聚合,故称之为“身”;或是仅就特相之地,将遍满全身、具多种差别且前后相续转起的这一切,以聚合的方式总括而称为“身”。其余诸界也应同样理解。显示巴利原文
Pathavīkāyanti kesādiṃ pathavīdhammasamūhattā ‘‘kāyo’’ti vadati, lakkhaṇapathavimeva vā anekabhedabhinnaṃ sakalasarīragataṃ pubbāpariyabhāvena pavattamānaṃ samūhavasena gahetvā ‘‘kāyo’’ti vadati. Evaṃ aññatthāpi.
“称为行相聚合的”:这是无常等行相总集的同义语。显示巴利原文
Ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassāti aniccatādiākārasamudāyapariyāyassa.
“于三有中的烦恼”:即关乎三有的烦恼。“一切处”:意思是,在一切情况下,当心下劣或掉举时,由于有所希求的利益需要达成;或者说,无论心下劣或掉举,一切应修的觉支都因此念而有,故称“一切处”。“内缩”:指内心的退缩,即懈怠。显示巴利原文
Tīsu bhavesu kileseti bhavattayavisayakilese. Sabbatthikanti sabbattha līne, uddhate ca citte icchitabbatthā, sabbe vā līne, uddhate ca bhāvetabbā bojjhaṅgā atthikā etāyāti sabbatthikā. Anto saṅkocoti anto olīyanā, kosajjanti attho.
24 “gahitesu”:意为“以修习的执取”所说的“执取”,即“已修习”之义;或以言说表述的“执取”。然此处旨在阐明修习上的执取,故以言说指代修习上的执取,是此处的重点。对于已修习念处者,其正勤等菩提分法却未修习——此事绝无可能,无有是处;且为以共相点明此义,故经中云:“当四念处修习时,四正勤于修习上亦得圆满”等。显示巴利原文
24.Gahitesūti bhāvanāggahaṇena gahitesu, bhāvitesūti attho, vacanena vā gahitesu. Bhāvanāggahaṇadīpanatthattā pana vacanena gahaṇassa bhāvanāggahaṇamettha padhānaṃ. Yassa satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā, tassa sammappadhānādayo bodhipakkhiyadhammā na bhāvitāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti ca samānalakkhaṇatāpadesena imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu cattāro sammappadhānā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
由于颠倒与道正相违,故颠倒得以舍断。如经中说:“由食集而有身集,由触集而有受集”(《相应部》5.408)、“行缘识,识缘名色”(《相应部》1.1, 39;《中部》3.126;《大品》1;《优陀那》1;《分别》225),是故成为身等集因的段食、触食、意思食、识食,由身等的遍知而得遍知,因为断除它们之对治即是遍知。为显示此义,故说“四食”等。“遍一切”即如“于诸取而无取”等处。显示巴利原文
Vipallāsāpahīyanti ujuvipaccanīkabhāvato. ‘‘Āhārasamudayā kāyassa samudayo, phassasamudayā vedanānaṃ samudayo (saṃ. ni. 5.408), saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.1, 39; ma. ni. 3.126; mahāva. 1; udā. 1; vibha. 225) vacanato kāyādīnaṃ samudayabhūtā kabaḷīkārāhāraphassamanosañcetanāviññāṇāhārākāyādīnaṃ parijānanena pariññātā honti tappaṭipakkhappahānatoti dassento ‘‘cattāroāhārā’’tiādimāha. Sabbatthāti ‘‘upādānehi anupādāno bhavatī’’ti evamādīsu.
其中,由于五欲功德殊胜现于身中,故身尤是欲取的依处;由于以乐受为滋味,不顾他世,而生起“无布施”等(《长部》1.171;《中部》1.445; 2.94-95, 225; 3.91, 116;《相应部》3.210;《法集》1221;《分别》938)的执取,故受是见取的依处;于心上,由于执取为恒常,对常见生起“依戒等而得清净”的执取,故心是戒禁取的依处;不能依名色差别如实见真实者,则生起“我之执着”,故法是我语取的依处。因此说:“修习四念处者,于诸取而无取。”显示巴利原文
Tattha yasmā pañca kāmaguṇā savisesā kāye labbhantīti visesena kāyo kāmupādānassa vatthu, sukhavedanassādavasena paralokanirapekkho ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 1.171; ma. ni. 1.445; 2.94-95, 225; 3.91, 116; saṃ. ni. 3.210; dha. sa. 1221; vibha. 938) parāmāsaṃ uppādetīti diṭṭhupādānassa vedanā, citte niccaggahaṇavasena sassatassa ‘‘attano sīlādivasena parisuddhaparāmasanaṃ hotī’’ti sīlabbatupādānassa cittaṃ, nāmarūpaparicchedena bhūtaṃ bhūtato apassantassa ‘‘attābhiniveso hotī’’ti attavādupādānassa dhammā vatthu, tasmā ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu upādānehi anupādāno bhavatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
再者,依循前述之理,身是欲轭的依处;于诸有中,因执取乐而品尝有之滋味,故受是有轭的依处;于心,因执持相续、密集之相而生起我执,故心是见轭的依处;于诸法,因难以作法的简别,且法唯是法性而难通达,故产生痴,因此法是无明轭的依处。是以,由修习四念处而成就对这些轭的断除,故说于诸轭中得度。正据此,才赞叹从诸漏中成无漏,及从诸暴流中得度,因为所谓的欲贪等,即是欲轭、欲漏、欲暴流等的体性。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana vuttanayeneva kāyo kāmayogassa vatthu, bhavesu sukhaggahaṇavasena bhavassādo hotīti bhavayogassa vedanā, santatighanaggahaṇavasena citte attābhiniveso hotīti diṭṭhiyogassacittaṃ, dhammavinibbhogassa dukkarattā, dhammānaṃ dhammamattatāya ca duppaṭivijjhattā sammoho hotīti avijjāyogassa dhammā, vatthu, tasmā catusatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya tesu tesaṃ pahānasiddhito yogehi visaṃyuttatā vuttā. Eteneva āsavehi anāsavatā, oghehi nittiṇṇatā ca saṃvaṇṇitā hoti kāmarāgādīnaṃ eva kāmayogakāmāsavakāmoghādibhāvato.
依循前述之理,身是贪欲身系的依处;“于苦受,嗔随眠随逐”(《中部》1.465),而苦受、变易苦、行苦所摄的受,特为嗔恚身系的依处;于心,由执取常恒之常见,生起“凭自戒得清净”等执取,故心是戒禁取身系的依处;由于未能见到名色依缘而生,便生起有见与无见,称为“此是真实”之执着,故法是该执着的依处——这些应与四念处联系起来理解。显示巴利原文
Vuttanayeneva kāyo abhijjhākāyaganthassa vatthu, ‘‘dukkhāya vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465) dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhabhūtā vedanā visesena byāpādakāyaganthassa vatthu, citte niccābhinivesavasena sassatassa ‘‘attano sīlena suddhī’’tiādiparāmasanaṃ hotīti sīlabbataparāmāsassa cittaṃ vatthu, sappaccayanāmarūpadassanābhāvato bhavavibhavadiṭṭhisaṅkhāto idaṃsaccābhiniveso hotīti tassa dhammā vatthūti catusatipaṭṭhānāti yojetabbaṃ.
依循前述之理,身特为贪箭的依处,受为瞋箭的依处;“心由执取常恒、执着我见,将自我视为殊胜等而烧燃”,故心是慢箭的依处;依照已说之理,法是痴箭的依处——这应与四念处联系起来理解。显示巴利原文
Vuttanayeneva visesato kāyo rāgasallassa vatthu, vedanā dosasallassa, ‘‘cittaṃ niccaggahaṇavasena attābhinivesaṃ attānaṃ seyyādito dahatī’’ti cittaṃ mānasallassa, vuttanayeneva dhammā mohasallassa vatthūti catusatipaṭṭhānāti yojetabbaṃ.
然而,由于通过身随观等遍知身、受、心、法时,色、受、想、行诸蕴便得以遍知。实际上,当心被遍知时,想也随之遍知,所以经中说:「而他的识住亦达遍知。」显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana kāyānupassanādīhi kāyavedanācittadhammesu pariññātesu rūpavedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhā pariññātā honti, citte hi pariññāte saññāpi pariññātāva hoti, tasmā ‘‘viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo cassa pariññaṃ gacchantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
同样地,特别而言,因对身有所期冀即行于欲邪行,故身是欲邪行的依处;依前所述之理,受是瞋恚的相,故为瞋邪行的依处;由于执取相续与密集,于有贪等心中生起痴,故心是痴邪行的依处;由于不能了悟法的自性而生起怖畏,故法是怖畏邪行的依处。因此,通过修习四念处而断除诸邪行,所以说「不因邪行而行邪行」。显示巴利原文
Tathā visesato kāye sāpekkhā chandāgatiṃ gacchatīti kāyo chandāgatiyā vatthu, vuttanayeneva vedanā byāpādassa nimittanti sā dosāgatiyā vatthu, santatighanaggahaṇavasena sarāgādicitte sammoho hotīti mohāgatiyā cittaṃ, dhammasabhāvānavabodhena bhayaṃ hotīti bhayāgatiyā dhammā vatthūti catusatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya agatigamanappahānaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘agatigamanehi ca na agatiṃ gacchatī’’ti.
「由于不善的喜悦」这句话,是考虑到「亦有此义」而说的。然而,依据「于乐受随眠贪随逐」(《中部》1.465)之文,应知:由摄受乐受及其中的随眠,即教导了集圣谛。而所谓「苦圣谛被教导」,则是由摄受苦苦,以尤为显著的方式开示了苦圣谛。至于在俱行等中当说的内容,已于下文《指示分释论注释》(《导论注》5等)中说明了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Akusalassa somanassassa vasenā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘ayampi attho sambhavatī’’ti katvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sukhāya vedanāya rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465) pana vacanato sukhavedanāggahaṇena tatthānusayanena samudayasaccaṃ desitanti veditabbaṃ. Desitaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti dukkhadukkhaggahaṇena sātisayaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ pakāsitaṃ hotīti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ desita’’nti vuttaṃ. Sahacaraṇādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā niddesavāravaṇṇanāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 5 ādayo) vuttaṃ.
6. 《四阵执持分释注释》显示巴利原文
6. Catubyūhahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
25 “Hārānaṃ”一词,在简择义中为属格。在诸执持之中,此四阵执持的特相在于审察经文文句,故成此连接。因此说“显示文句……等”。而“yāyā”则是依词源学而言。显示巴利原文
25.Hārānanti niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ. Hāresu imassa catubyūhahārassa visesato suttassa byañjanavicayabhāvatoti yojanā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘byañjana…pe… dassetī’’ti. Yāyāti niruttiyā.
“Yathārahaṃ”(随宜)意为:在注释经文时,凡适合给出的词源解释,皆唯随顺世间共许。修习圆满前行道后,随即证得谛现观,故说“世俗……等……是”。或者,以把握施设之名目为门径而通达究竟谛,这便是此关联之意。显示巴利原文
Yathārahanti saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte yaṃ yaṃ arahati nibbacanaṃ vattuṃ, taṃtaṃlokasamaññānurodheneva. Pubbabhāgapaṭipadā sampādetvā pacchā saccābhisamayaṃ pāpuṇātīti āha ‘‘sammuti…pe… hotī’’ti, taṃtaṃpaññattiggahaṇamukhena paramatthaggahaṇaṃ hotīti evaṃ vā iminā sambandho.
“ubhayamantarena”(两者之间)在此处是就不属根所系缚的色相续而说。而在《入处纲要》(《指导论》注42等)中,为显示它是就依门转起的触等诸法而说,故给出“在触等俱生诸法之中”这一含义。然而,注释师们说:“‘antarena’(之间)这个词,是展现另一种解释之说。”因此,这里的含义是:不是此世间,不是他世间,而是这两者之间。另一种解释认为:“ubhayamantarena”一词表示并无另外的解释;其意为:禅修者不依止此世间,亦不依止他世间来修习禅那,而是于两者之间另有其处。显示巴利原文
Yamidaṃ anindriyabaddharūpasantānaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ubhayamantarenā’’ti idha vuttaṃ. Otaraṇahāre (netti. aṭṭha. 42 ādayo) panassa dvārappavattaphassādidhamme sandhāya vuttabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ubhayamantarenāti phassasamuditesu dhammesū’’ti attho vutto. Aṭṭhakathācariyā panāhu ‘‘antarenāti vacanaṃ pana vikappantaradīpana’’nti. Tasmā ayamettha attho – na imaṃ lokaṃ, na huraṃ lokaṃ, atha kho ubhayamantarenāti. Aparo vikappo – ubhayamantarenāti vā vacanaṃ vikappantarābhāvadīpanaṃ. Tassattho – na imaṃ lokaṃ, na huraṃ lokaṃ nissāya jhāyati jhāyī, ubhayamantarena pana aññaṃ ṭhānaṃ atthīti.
对于错误理解“中般涅槃者”和“有求再生者”这些经文词句的意义,从而主张存在“中有”的人,也应予以驳斥。因为在无热天等诸处,有人未超过那里的寿量中际,便在中途证得最高道,以无余烦恼的般涅槃而般涅槃,故称“中般涅槃者”,即中途般涅槃者,并非处于中有状态——这是前一句经文之义。后一句中的“有求再生者”:那些已出现、不再受生的人,即诸漏尽者,前句称其为“已生”;与此相反,仍在寻求再生的人,便称为“有求再生者”。由于他们还未破坏有的结缚,故属有学和凡夫。或者,从四生来分别:卵生与胎生的有情,只要尚未破开蛋壳及子宫膜,便称为“有求再生者”;从蛋壳、子宫膜出来后,即名为“已生”。湿生与化生者,在第一个心识刹那称为“有求再生者”,从第二个心识刹那开始,便是“已生”。还有一种解释:依照某一威仪而生,只要尚未达到其他威仪,那时即是“有求再生者”,此后便是“已生”。因此,应当否定中有存在。既然有直接随顺经文的含义,何必还要用那种功能不确定、凭空构想的“有身”呢?显示巴利原文
Yepi ca ‘‘antarāparinibbāyī, sambhavesī’’ti ca imesaṃ suttapadānaṃ atthaṃ micchā gahetvā atthi eva antarābhavoti vadanti, tepi yasmā avihādīsu tattha tattha āyuvemajjhaṃ anatikkamitvā antarā aggamaggādhigamena anavasesakilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyantīti antarāparinibbāyī, na antarābhavabhūtoti purimassa suttapadassa attho. Pacchimassa ca ye bhūtā eva, na puna bhavissanti, te hi (kathā. anuṭī. 507) khīṇāsavā, purimapadehi ‘‘bhūtā’’ti vuttā. Tabbiparītatāya sambhavaṃ esantīti sambhavesino. Appahīnabhavasaṃyojanattā sekkhā, puthujjanā ca. Catūsu vā yonīsu aṇḍajajalābujasattā yāva aṇḍakosaṃ, vatthikosañca na bhindanti, tāva sambhavesī nāma. Aṇḍakosato, vatthikosato ca bahi nikkhantā bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajaopapātikā ca paṭhamacittakkhaṇe sambhavesī nāma, dutiyacittakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya bhūtā nāma. Yena vā iriyāpathena jāyanti, yāva tato aññaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tāva sambhavesī, tato paraṃ bhūtāti attho, tasmā natthīti paṭikkhipitabbaṃ. Sati hi ujuke pāḷianugate atthe kiṃ aniddhāritasāmatthiyena antarābhavena attabhāvaparikappitena payojananti.
有人提出这样的论证:“我们见到,依相续转起的诸法,在两地之间无间断地生起。如同在稻种等无识的相续中如此,那么在有识的相续中,也必定无间断地在两地之间生起。这个道理,只有承认中有才合理,否则便说不通。”对于他们,应请其解释:具足神通、心得自在的修行者,将心安住于随心所转之身后,能于一刹那间从梵天界来至此地,或从此地去往梵天界,这其中的道理何在?如果一切情况下都不允许法在有间断的地方转起,那么纵使他们说“神通境界不可思惟”,这里同样也有“业异熟不可思惟”的说法。因此,那只是他们一己之见罢了。因为自性法本身便具有不可测量的性质,它们有时藉由某种特殊的缘而在间断之处显现,有时又在无间断处显现。犹如口中发出的声音等,在另一处,如镜面或山崖等处,会见到依缘而起的影像、回声等。所以,不可将一种道理不加分别地套用于一切情况。这便是此处的大要。至于以影像等为譬喻详细破斥中有的论题,应从《论事》的注书(《论事注》)中了解。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana ye ‘‘santānavasena pavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ avicchedena desantaresu pātubhāvo diṭṭho. Yathā taṃ vīhiādiaviññāṇakasantāne, evaṃ saviññāṇakasantānepi avicchedena desantaresu pātubhāvena bhavitabbaṃ. Ayañca nayo sati antarābhave yujjati, nāññathā’’ti yuttiṃ vadanti. Tehi iddhimato cetovasippattassa cittānugatikaṃ kāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahantassa khaṇena brahmalokato idhūpasaṅkamane, ito vā brahmalokagamane yutti vattabbā. Yadi sabbattheva vicchinnadese dhammānaṃ pavatti na icchitā, yadipi siyā ‘‘iddhivisayo acinteyyo’’ti, taṃ idhāpi samānaṃ ‘‘kammavipāko acinteyyo’’ti vacanato, tasmā taṃ tesaṃ matimattameva. Acinteyyasabhāvā hi sabhāvadhammā, te katthaci paccayavisesena vicchinnadese pātubhavanti, katthaci avicchinnadese ca. Tathā hi mukhaghosādīhi aññasmiṃ dese ādāsapabbatappadesādike paṭibimbapaṭighosādikaṃ paccayuppannaṃ nibbattamānaṃ dissati, tasmā na sabbaṃ sabbattha upanetabbanti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana paṭibimbassa udāharaṇabhāvasādhanādiko antarābhavavicāro kathāvatthuppakaraṇassaṭīkāyaṃ (kathā. anuṭī. 507) gahetabbo.
另有些人则说:“‘此处’指欲有,‘他处’指无色有,‘两者之间’指色有。”也有人说:“‘此处’指缘法,‘他处’指缘生法,‘两者之间’指施设法。”但这些说法在一切注释书中都无记载,因此应当只依前面所述的方法来理解其义。所说的“剩余色”,是指与水界、空界俱存的相色以及食素,因为这里指的是那些不与根相连的色。对于那位漏尽者,他那以涅槃为所缘的心,既不被知道,也不被了知,因为经中说“正在禅虑”。其余部分很容易理解。显示巴利原文
Apare pana ‘‘idhāti kāmabhavo, huranti arūpabhavo, ubhayamantarenāti rūpabhavo vutto’’ti vadanti, ‘‘idhāti paccayadhammā, huranti paccayuppannadhammā, ubhayamantarenāti paṇṇattidhammā vuttā’’ti ca vadanti, taṃ sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu natthi, tasmā vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Avasiṭṭhaṃ rūpanti āpodhātuākāsadhātūhi saddhiṃ lakkhaṇarūpāni, ojañca sandhāyāha anindriyabaddharūpassa adhippetattā. Tassa khīṇāsavassa taṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ na jānanti na ñāyanti ‘‘jhāyamānā’’ti vuttattā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第七 转向纲要分别注释显示巴利原文
7. Āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
29 由于诸不善法有破坏的本质,或在断除不善、令善生起时,有策励建立的本质,故称为「策发界」。「成为那样者」指具足戒等功德的人。欲界等即是三界。因征服了三界,三界自在者被称为「死王」。这些烦恼虽于无始轮回中长久扎根,但仅由短时修习善法即可断除,所以说烦恼是「无力、虚弱」的。因此说“无力者却能战胜他”。显示巴利原文
29. Akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ viddhaṃsanasabhāvattā, akusalānaṃ vā pajahane kusalānaṃ sampādane paṭṭhapanasabhāvattā ārambhadhātu. Tathābhūtāti sīlādīhi samaṅgībhūtā. Kāmadhātuādikā tidhātuyova tedhātu. Tassa abhibhavanato tedhātuissaro maccurājā. Anādimatisaṃsāre cirakālaṃ laddhapatiṭṭhāpi acirakālaṃ bhāvitehi kusalehi dhammehi samucchindanīyattā abalā kilesāti vuttaṃ ‘‘abalaṃ dubbala’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘abalā naṃ balīyantī’’ti.
这句话是此偈颂中的一节。「定的近因」在此应理解为:以策励于平等修习作为定的因。此理亦适用于余处。「戏论」即贪等烦恼。「如此而作解释」的意思是:以该教说为近因而作义理解释。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ vacanaṃ ayaṃ gāthāpādo. Samādhissa padaṭṭhānanti ettha samādhissa kāraṇaṃ samatānuyoge niyojanatoti yojetabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Papañcāti rāgādayova. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitanti desanāya padaṭṭhānabhāveneva atthasaṃvaṇṇanā katāti attho.
“Nti”指该教说。“Tassā”指转向,以同类等方式,对慧成熟者而言,是为了殊胜的证悟。在“利得、决断、执取、悭吝”等词中,“利得”指获得色等所缘。由于存在寻求时它才生起,故被“寻求”一词所涵盖。“决断”指如此生起的考虑:“这些将用于我的色所缘,这些用于声等所缘,这些是我的,这些是别人的,这些我将受用,这些我将储存。”这就是决断。因它以利得为因、以寻求为根本,故同样被“寻求”一词所涵盖;执取与悭吝亦是如此。其中,“执取”是“这是我的”这种执持。“悭吝”是“只能是我的”,不能忍受与他人共享。因此,古代诸师这样解释词义:“‘悭吝’意为‘愿此唯是我的悭吝,不成为他人的稀有’,如是转起,故称悭吝。”至于受用方面的决断等,应知它们归属于受用。“欲贪”是微弱的贪。“执著”是“这是我的”,以渴爱之力作出的强力决定,故说“欲贪与执著即是渴爱”。“守护相”是通过关门、锁箱等方式妥善守护的相。而受用之相,是当人染着、贪求、执取、迷恋,如野兽般受用时,显示巴利原文
Nti taṃ desanaṃ. Tassāti sabhāgādivasena āvaṭṭanassa. Paripakkañāṇānaṃ visesādhigamāya. Lābhavinicchayapariggahamacchariyānītiādīsu lābhoti rūpādiārammaṇappaṭilābho. So pariyesanāya sati hotīti pariyesanāggahaṇena gahito. Vinicchayoti ‘‘ettakaṃ me rūpārammaṇatthāya bhavissati, ettakaṃ saddādiārammaṇatthāya, ettakaṃ mayhaṃ, ettakaṃ parassa, ettakaṃ paribhuñjissāmi, ettakaṃ nidahissāmī’’ti evaṃ pavatto vitakko vinicchayo. So lāpitahetukattā pariyesanamūlakatāya pariyesanāggahaṇeneva gahito, tathā pariggahamacchariyāni. Tattha pariggaho ‘‘mama ida’’nti pariggaṇhanaṃ. Macchariyaṃ ‘‘mayheva hotū’’ti parehi sādhāraṇabhāvāsahanaṃ. Tenevassa porāṇā evaṃ vacanatthaṃ vadanti ‘‘mayhevidamacchariyaṃ hotu, mā aññesaṃ acchariyaṃ hotūti pavattattā macchariyanti vuccatī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.103; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.9.23). Paribhogatthānaṃ pana vinicchayādīnaṃ paribhogantogadhatā veditabbā. Chandarāgo dubbalarāgo. Ajjhosānaṃ ‘‘mama ida’’nti taṇhāvasena balavasanniṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘chandarāgaajjhosānā taṇhā evā’’ti. Ārakkhanimittaṃ dvārapidahanamañjūsāgopanādinā suṭṭhu rakkhaṇanimittaṃ. Pāpāni karonto paribhoganimittaṃ ratto giddho gadhito mucchito hutvā migova paribhuñjananimittaṃ pamādaṃ āpajjatīti evaṃ pariyenārakkhā paribhoganimittaṃ. Pamādo tividho taṇhāya vasena kathitoti dassento ‘‘tividho taṇhāyāti vutta’’nti āha.
“以不分别的方式说”,是指虽然以“以何种取而成为有取”这样分别地提问,但回答却不加区分地说“以无明与爱”。“爱与无明依四取”则是依欲取等四种取分别说明,以此显示:诸蕴是苦、是苦圣谛而应被遍知;诸取是集、是集圣谛而应被断除——如此配合。显示巴利原文
Avisesena vuttanti ‘‘katamena upādānena saupādānā’’ti vibhāgena pucchitvāpi ‘‘avijjāya ca taṇhāya cā’’ti avinibbhujitvā vuttaṃ. Taṇhañca avijjañca caturupādānaṃvasenāti kāmupādānādīnaṃ catunnaṃ upādānānaṃ vasena vibhajitvā khandhānaṃ dukkhabhāvena dukkhasaccabhāvena saha pariññeyyabhāvaṃ, upādānānaṃ samudayabhāvena samudayasaccabhāvena saha pahātabbabhāvaṃ dassetīti yojanā.
30 以“Yo...”等所说,有三种放逸,与寻求、守护及受用相关联。对于放逸者而言,放逸是寻求财物、守护财物的因,故以作者来指称;而对于受用,它则是受用之相。“以其对治”一词的含义,通过“以不放逸的修习”来阐明,由此显示止的状态。“Khepanā”(弃除)是指导向灭尽。这是以清净分——即与放逸不共存法——之力:清净分即彼放逸的不共存法,也就是……法、止,依此力而说。显示巴利原文
30.‘‘Yo’’tiādinā vutto tividho pamādo pariyesati, ārakkhaṇañca karoti, paribhoganimittañcāti sambandho. Pamādo hi pamajjantassa puggalassa bhogānaṃ pariyesanāya, ārakkhaṇāya ca hetubhūto kattubhāvena upacarito, paribhogassa pana nimittaṃ. ‘‘Tappaṭipakkhenā’’ti padassa atthaṃ vivarati ‘‘appamādānuyogenā’’ti, tena samathabhāvaṃ dasseti . Khepanāti khayapāpanā. Vodānapakkhavisabhāgadhammavasenāti vodānapakkho ca so pamādassa visabhāgadhammo cāti vodāna…pe… dhammo, samatho, tassa vasena.
“当有止时”是指住于作为基础的禅那时,即以彼禅那为根本之意。“所谓慧”是指从名色分别等开始生起的智慧,因此他说“这是观”。“Pahīnesu”是指在正在被断除的诸法当中。显示巴利原文
Samathe satīti adhiṭṭhānabhūte jhāne sati, taṃ pādakaṃ katvāti attho. Yā paññāti nāmarūpaparicchedādivasena pavattapaññā. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ vipassanā’’ti. Pahīnesūti pahīyamānesu.
“清净分”是说,在放下勤界等清净分之后。“以不共法之力”即依放逸之力。“以共法之力”即依先前所置的勤界等清净法,以及止等共法之力。显示巴利原文
Vodānapakkhanti ārambhadhātuādivodānapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā. Visabhāgadhammavasenāti pamādavaseneva. Sabhāgadhammavasenāti pubbe nikkhittassa ārambhadhātuādivodānadhammassa samathādisabhāgadhammavasena.
再者,此处所指并非尚未净化,而是已达顶点的净化,因此说“但这由阿拉汉而有”。显示巴利原文
Puna apariyodāpaniyaṃ sikhāppattapariyodāpanaṃ idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘taṃ pana arahattena hotī’’ti.
说“以痴等起”,即是确立“唯痴是等起”。否则,离间语以嗔恚等起,而妄语亦有以痴等起的情形,便应作如是说。显示巴利原文
Mohasamuṭṭhānatā vuttā ‘‘moho eva samuṭṭhāna’’nti katvā. Aññathā pisuṇāvācāya dosasamuṭṭhānatā musāvādassa viya mohasamuṭṭhānabhāvā vattabbā siyā.
达到业道状态与未达到业道状态的不善法,皆由「一切恶」一词所总摄,故说「以业道业之分别」。显示巴利原文
Kammapathabhāvaṃ pattānaṃ, appattānañca akusaladhammānaṃ ‘‘sabbapāpa’’nti padena pariggahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kammapathakammavibhāgenā’’ti.
31 「其余诸句」指这首偈颂中「善之具足」等余下的语句。「如所证得」指自己证得的方式;其后为地、方向。显示巴利原文
31.Sesapadānanti ‘‘kusalassa upasampadā’’tiādīnaṃ (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183; netti. 30, 50, 116, 124; peṭako. 29) gāthāya avasiṭṭhapadānaṃ. Yathādhigatanti attanā adhigatappakāraṃ, pacchā bhūmidisā.
「Upariyāpentī」指使人从人界上升到更高的天界。显示巴利原文
Upariyāpentīti manussalokato upariṭṭhimaṃ devalokaṃ gamenti.
32 “如所说的法”,即指戒与道。“渴爱、无明等”:以“等”字一并含摄与它们同处的烦恼,以及那些烦恼的所依处之法。“止、观等”:以“等”字包含沙门果。而且,由于此处已说“灭即守护”,故通过“彼能守护”而说道是守护行为的工具。应如此理解:前二谛(苦、集)依不共法而得确立,后二谛(灭、道)则依共法回转而得确立。显示巴利原文
32.Yathāvuttassa dhammassāti sīlassa ca maggassa ca. Taṇhāvijjādīnanti ādisaddena tadekaṭṭhakilesā gayhanti, tesaṃ padaṭṭhānadhammā ca. Samathavipassanādīnanti ādisaddena sāmaññaphalānaṃ saṅgaho. Yadaggena cettha ‘‘nirodho rakkhatī’’ti vutto, tadaggena maggo rakkhaṇakiriyāya karaṇaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yena rakkhatī’’ti. Visabhāgadhammavasena purimāni sabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena pacchimāni saccāni niddhāritānīti yojetabbaṃ.
第八项 「分别之蕴」的解释显示巴利原文
8. Vibhattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
33 “于诸法”是指:在诸如福业、布施等类别各异、具有自性的法之中。这里所说的“可得者”,即在这些前述诸法中所能获得的那一个。“地之分别”,是以欲界等或以见等为内容的地类区分。“立足处之分别”,指那些福业等法是某些法的立足处,或者作为那些福业等法之立足处的法,它们之间的分类。“哪些经”,是以作为根本立足处的四部经——即杂染分等——为基础而说的。正是因为凭借这四部经不混杂地确立了法的界限,诸法才被特别地分别开来说,故说“特别地”。若是如此,这里为何只举出习惯分与抉择分呢?其实并非如此,因为通过“出离”与“究竟”两个层面,另外两种也已经被包含在内。也就是说,凡是透过出离而超越的习惯分的法,它们本身就是杂染分;凡是那些以抉择分为究竟目标而修习的法,它们就是无学分位。因此,只举显示巴利原文
33.Dhammesūti puññādidānādibhedabhinnesu sabhāvadhammesu. Tattha labbhamānoti tesu yathāvuttesu dhammesu labbhamāno. Bhūmivibhāgoti kāmāvacarādidassanādibhūmippabhedo. Padaṭṭhānavibhāgoti te puññādidhammā yesaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ vā ye dhammā padaṭṭhānaṃ, tabbibhāgo. Yesaṃ suttānanti mūlapadaṭṭhānabhūtānaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyādīnaṃ catunnaṃ suttānaṃ vasena. Asaṅkaravavatthānena hi etesu suttesu sātisayaṃ dhammā vibhattā nāma honti. Tenāha ‘‘visesato’’ti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyasuttāni evettha gahitānīti? Nayidamevaṃ nikkhamanapariyosānabhāvena itaresampi gahitattā. Yato hi nissaṭā vāsanābhāgiyā dhammā, te saṃkilesabhāgiyā. Yaṃpariyosānā nibbedhabhāgiyā dhammā, te asekkhabhāgiyāti dvayaggahaṇeneva itarampi dvayaṃ gahitameva hoti. Tenāha ‘‘imesaṃ catunnaṃ suttānaṃ desanāyā’’ti. Imāni cattāri suttānīti pāḷiyā, vakkhamānāya desanāya vā itaradvayasaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo, na paṭikkhepo.
“就由此”:因为决定性尚未被成就,但通过此(梵行),以及依止于此(梵行)而成为梵行者,此理可得成立。或者,此处的“eva”一词,应被理解为“合集”之义。“或许有对它的否定”,指对于那种仅以八等至为梵行的主张,可能有否定。倘若如此,所说的教法便会显得有所保留,尚有未开示的余法。显示巴利原文
Tenevāti niyamassa akatattā, tato ca tena tannissitena ca brahmacārī bhavatīti siddhaṃ hoti. Eva-saddo vā samuccayattho daṭṭhabbo. Siyā tassa paṭikkhepoti tassa aṭṭhasamāpattibrahmacariyassa siyā paṭikkhepo. Evaṃ sati sāvasesā desanā siyā.
如彼分断等两种断依处而立,在此不计入计数,故说“依正断与止息断而言”。同样,此处有人将经文读作“tena eva”。而“读作‘tena eva brahmacariyena’(由彼梵行)”一句,是针对“立于防护戒”(《指导论》33)处所提到的圣典异读而说。“因为……将说……”这句,则是为了说明后一种读法更为合理的原因。显示巴利原文
Tadaṅgādippahānadvayaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ idha gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti ‘‘samucchedapaṭippassaddhippahānānaṃ vasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā hettha keci ‘‘tenevā’’ti paṭhanti. ‘‘Teneva brahmacariyenāti paṭhantī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘saṃvarasīle ṭhito’’ti (netti. 33) ettha vuttaṃ pāḷivikappaṃ sandhāya vadati. ‘‘Yasmā…pe… vakkhatī’’ti idaṃ pacchimapāṭhasseva yuttatāya kāraṇavacanaṃ.
如何理解呢?广大福业以“非抉择”为自性,故不为抉择分经所摄;然而,因其属于习惯分,故恰好为习惯分经所摄。正因归属于习惯分,后一种读法才更为恰当。否则,教说便会有所缺漏,不够完整。因此,(论师)才说:“因为不是……开示……。”显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ mantāti? Anibbedhasabhāvattā mahaggatapuññānaṃ na nibbedhabhāgiyasuttena saṅgaho, vāsanābhāgiyattā pana vāsanābhāgiyasutteneva saṅgahoti. Tadupasaṅgā hi pacchimo eva pāṭho yuttataro. Itarathā sāvasesā desanā bhaveyya. Tenāha ‘‘na hi…pe… desetī’’ti.
由于杂染分与无学分的内容将在后面宣说,故说“依即将说到的……”。至于“一切处”(sabbato)一词,意为“兼顾前后文”。因其需顾后,注疏中便将其释为“以一切部分,置于十一处之后”。在那里,针对“句”等观察之蕴的句义,而说“于十一处中”。然而,因也需顾前,故亦应作“以一切部分,由开示、由果……”等解释。显示巴利原文
Saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyānaṃ parato vakkhamānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vakkhamānānaṃ…pe… vasenā’’ti. ‘‘Sabbato’’ti idaṃ pubbaparāpekkhaṃ. Tassa parāpekkhatāya ‘‘sabbatobhāgena ekādasasu ṭhānesu pakkhipitvā’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ yojitaṃ. Tattha padādike vicayahārapadatthe sandhāya ‘‘ekādasasu ṭhānesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Pubbapekkhatāya pana ‘‘sabbatobhāgena desanāya phalenā’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ.
关于杂染部分:应通过渴爱与杂染等方式来了知其教说方式。其果报,当以恶趣之苦及人间所遇的种种不幸来了知。关于无学分位:应通过无学的圣戒蕴等来了知其教说方式。其果报,当以最上果及无余涅槃界来了知。至于其余部分,在圣典中已说过了。由于通过把握欲贪、瞋恚及上分结而讲说杂染部分,又通过把握离贪及无学而讲说无学分位,因此说‘依即将说到的……’。为了显示应通过观察句与句义、推断、确定等方式来作法的分别等种种观察,圣典中说‘以观察……应被……’,所以注释书说:‘以观察……显示了……’。显示巴利原文
Saṃkilesabhāgiyānaṃ taṇhāsaṃkilesādinā desanānayo veditabbo. Phalaṃ apāyadukkhena manussesu dobhaggiyena. Asekkhabhāgiyānaṃ asekkhehi sīlakkhandhādīhi desanānayo. Phalaṃ aggaphalena ca anupādisesāya ca nibbānadhātuyā veditabbaṃ. Itaresaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttameva. Kāmarāgabyāpādauddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanaggahaṇena saṃkilesabhāgiyānaṃ, virāgaggahaṇena asekkhaggahaṇeneva ca asekkhabhāgiyānaṃ vakkhamānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vakkhamānānaṃ…pe… vasenā’’ti. Padapadatthavicārayuttiniddhāraṇamukhena dhammavibhattiādivicāro kātabboti dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘vicayena…pe… tabbānī’’ti vuttanti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘vicayena…pe… dassetī’’ti vuttaṃ.
34 “如是”是对 evaṃ 的解释。“法”指所说的同类法。“通过共与不共的状态”,是指通过共相与特相来加以区分。所谓“二法共”,是指有此二法,由于它们,同类法才被称为“共”。哪两个?名与事。其中,“名”指名施设,正是通过名的途径,从声音当中得以领悟其意义。而且,声音仅以共相的方式把握那种意义,并非以特相的方式;因此,凡是能被言词表达的意义,由于必须依凭共相之名来把握,故称为“名共”。“事”是指转起处,即诸法在何处转起,对于所有那些法来说,称为转起处的那些事便是共的。然而,由于这两者对于诸法的共性是本然、自性如此的,所以说“二法就是两种自性”。所谓“同一相续流转”,是指在同一相续中转起,因此他说“同所依”。因为对于见所断法,正如邪决定有情是它们的转起处,不定者也是如此,所以这两者都是同所依的。这一法则同样适用于其余诸法。因为有身见、疑、戒禁取这些法虽然自性不同,但都不超出“见所断”的范围,所以它们达到了名的共相;而色贪等是修所断,因此他说“同一所断,名共”。然而,正如“诸事的共,显示巴利原文
34.Evanti iti. Dhammeti vuttasabhāgadhamme. Sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhāvehīti sāmaññavisesena visiṭṭhehi. Dve dhammā sādhāraṇāti dve ime dhammā yehi sabhāgadhammā sādhāraṇā nāma honti. Katame dve? Nāmaṃ, vatthu ca. Tattha nāmaṃ nāmapaññatti, taṃmukheneva saddato tadatthāvagamo. Saddena ca sāmaññarūpeneva tathārūpassa atthassa gahaṇaṃ, na visesarūpena, tasmā saddavacanīyā atthā sādhāraṇarūpanāmāyattagahaṇīyatāya nāmasādhāraṇā vuttā. Vatthūti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ. Yattha hi ye dhammā pavattanti, tesaṃ sabbesaṃ te dhammā sādhāraṇāti pavattiṭṭhānasaṅkhātānaṃ vatthūnaṃ sādhāraṇā. Yasmā panidaṃ dvayaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sādhāraṇabhāve pakatibhūtaṃ sabhāvabhūtaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dve dhammāti duve pakatiyo’’ti. Ekasantatipatitatāyāti samānasantatipavattiyā. Tenāha ‘‘samānavatthukā’’ti. Dassanapahātabbānañhi yathā micchattaniyatasattā pavattiṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ aniyatāpīti ubhaye hi te samānavatthukā. Esa nayo itaresupi. Sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsā hi bhinnasabhāvāpete dhammā dassanena pahātabbataṃ nātivattantīti te nāmasāmaññataṃ pattā, rūparāgādayo ca bhāvanāya pahātabbatanti āha ‘‘pahānekaṭṭhā nāmasādhāraṇā’’ti. Yathā pana ‘‘vatthūnaṃ sādhāraṇā vatthusādhāraṇā’’ti ayamattho labbhati, evaṃ ‘‘vatthunā sādhāraṇā vatthusādhāraṇā’’ti ayampi attho labbhatīti dassento ‘‘sahajekaṭṭhā vatthusādhāraṇā’’ti āha. Te hi aññamaññaṃ phusanādisabhāvato bhinnāpi yasmiṃ pavattanti, tena vatthunā sādhāraṇā nāma honti. Ettha ca labbhamānampi kusalādināmasādhāraṇaṃ anāmasitvā vatthusādhāraṇā tāva yojitāti veditabbā. Paṭipakkhādīhīti ādisaddena samānaphalatāsahabyatādike saṅgaṇhāti. Sesapadesūti ‘‘puthujjanassā’’tiādivākyesu. Kathaṃ? Tattha hi puthujjanassa, sotāpannassa ca sambhavato anāgāmino, arahato ca asambhavatotiādinā yojetabbaṃ.
“如何被部分地把握”:以何种方式,那些被称为“共”的法被部分地把握?此处它的意义是“对于某某、对于某某”。处于共相状态的法才名为共,既然如此,为何又以邪决定、不定等区分而说有转起处呢?这是不应说的——这是其用意。如果还须加以分别解说,那又怎能说它们是共的呢?是的,所谓“共”,是对于邪决定者和不定者这两者来说,那些法才是共的。因此他说:“并非对一切众生皆共,所以称为共”。通过“因为”等说明了其中的原因,由此他显示:“某些法只对于某些法是共的,对于其他法则是不共的”。因此他说:“因为它们的转起处是特定的”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ te odhiso gahitāti kenākārena te ‘‘sādhāraṇā’’ti vuttadhammā bhāgaso gahitā. ‘‘Amukassa, amukassa cā’’ti ayañhettha attho. Sāmaññabhūtā dhammā sādhāraṇā nāma, evaṃ sante kathaṃ tesaṃ micchattaniyatāniyatādivasena vibhāgena pavattiṭṭhānatā vuccati, na vattabbanti adhippāyo. Atha vibhāgena taṃ vattabbaṃ, nanu te sādhāraṇāti na vattabbamevāti? Evaṃ sādhāraṇāti micchattaniyatānaṃ, aniyatānanti imesaṃ ubhayesaṃyeva te dhammā sādhāraṇā. Tenāha – ‘‘na sabbasattānaṃ sādhāraṇatāya sādhāraṇā’’ti. ‘‘Yasmā’’tiādinā tattha kāraṇamāha, tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘keci dhammā kesañcideva dhammānaṃ sādhāraṇā honti, aññesaṃ asādhāraṇā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘paṭiniyatañhi tesaṃ pavattiṭṭhāna’’nti.
“否则”:若不如是,由于转起之处不决定,它们可能对一切是共同的,或者是不共同的;倘若如此,“共”与“不共”这样的安立便仅是共相,而不能成立。“正是这些法”:即被说为“共”的那些法。“如是”:即如以“邪决定性者”等所说明的方式。它们是决定的领域,转起之处已被限定。“yopī”等,是为了清晰显示以人为所依而宣说的意义。“nahi”等则通过随转与相离的方式阐明该意义。于其余诸法也是如此:即在“修所断”等中亦然。显示巴利原文
Itarathāti aniyatapavattiṭṭhānatāya sabbesaṃ sādhāraṇā, asādhāraṇā vā siyuṃ, tathā sati. Tathā vohāroti ‘‘sādhāraṇā, asādhāraṇā’’ti ca ayaṃ vohāro sāmaññā eva na bhaveyya. Ete eva dhammāti ‘‘sādhāraṇā’’ti vuttadhammā eva. Evanti ‘‘micchattaniyatāna’’ntiādinā vuttappakārena. Niyatavisayā paricchinnappavattiṭṭhānā. ‘‘Yopī’’tiādi puggalādhiṭṭhānena vuttassevatthassa pākaṭakaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Na hī’’tiādinā anvayato, byatirekato ca tamevatthaṃ vibhāveti. Sesepīti ‘‘bhāvanāpahātabbā’’ti evamādimhipi.
“各别决定”:指随各别个人的。“其他的”:指非各别决定的。“如是”:即依不共的方式。某个法,依于某个法虽然可以是共的,但依于另一个法则可以是不共的,因此他说“共与不共的差异性”。因此他说“依取这个、那个”等。的确,如此便显示了被称为“法性”的初道位,对于仅具有那样多位的圣者们是共的。“第一”:是指第八者。“第二”:是指入流者。“再次的第八者”:是指在“第八者与不来者”这句中所说的第八者。因此他说“不来道位者”。从最胜果位开始逆数,初道位者是第八者;因为在道位与在断除烦恼上,所有道位者都如同第八者,故为第八者;或依词源学解释:‘从一心刹那之后不再住立,故为第八者’。“有学”这一名称是共的,这是结合。于其余诸处:即在所说的“可能、不可能”等非圣者中。因此,他在圣典中说“依下劣、最胜、中间”。显示巴利原文
Paccattaniyatoti pāṭipuggaliko. Itarassāti apaccattaniyatassa. Tathāti asādhāraṇabhāvena. Koci dhammo kañci dhammaṃ upādāya sādhāraṇopi samāno tadaññaṃ upādāya asādhāraṇopi hotīti āha ‘‘sādhāraṇāvidhuratāyā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ taṃ upādāyā’’tiādi. Tathā hi ‘‘dhammatā’’ti vuttapaṭhamamaggaṭṭhatā dīpitā, tādisānaṃ eva anekesaṃ ariyānaṃ vasena sādhāraṇāti . Paṭhamassāti aṭṭhamakassa. Dutiyassāti sotāpannassa. Puna aṭṭhamakassāti ‘‘aṭṭhamakassa, anāgāmissa cā’’ti ettha vuttaaṭṭhamakassa. Tenāha ‘‘anāgāmimaggaṭṭhassā’’ti. Aggaphalaṭṭhato paṭṭhāya paṭilomato gaṇiyamāno paṭhamamaggaṭṭho aṭṭhamako, maggaṭṭhatāya, pahīyamānakilesatāya ca sabbepi maggaṭṭhā aṭṭhamakā viyāti aṭṭhamakā, ‘‘ekacittakkhaṇato uddhaṃ na tiṭṭhatīti aṭṭhamako’’ti apare niruttinayena. ‘‘Sekkhā’’ti nāmaṃ sādhāraṇanti sambandho. Itaresūti ‘‘bhabbābhabbā’’ti vuttesu anariyesu. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘hīnukkaṭṭhamajjhimaṃ upādāyā’’ti.
“入决定”:即入于决定的状态。“智增上者”:即智慧优胜者。“如是种类之缘的和合”:即智慧殊胜之缘的会合。因为正如由于智慧力,不会成为迟钝通达;同样,行道者也能安乐地干涸(烦恼)。因为这种乐行道、速通达,对于具足它的人,由于智慧增上,被称为观的足处。显示巴利原文
Niyāmāvakkantiyāti avakkantaniyāmatāya. Ñāṇuttharassāti ñāṇādhikassa. Tathāvidhapaccayasamāyogeti ñāṇavisesapaccayasamavāye. Yathā hi ñāṇabalena dandhābhiññatā na hoti, evaṃ paṭipadāpaṭipannopi sukhena visosīyatīti. Sā hi sukhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā taṃsamaṅgino ñāṇuttarattā vipassanāya padaṭṭhānanti vuttā.
不离开法的思惟,即是‘法思惟’;由如理作意而生起的对法的思惟;或者,‘法’即是智慧,由此能带来法的思惟,故称法思惟,意思是:作为思所成慧之因的思惟。显示巴利原文
Dhammato anapetā cintā dhammacintā, yonisomanasikārena pavattitattā dhammesu cintā, dhammo vā ñāṇaṃ, tasmā dhammāvahā cintā dhammacintā, cintāmayañāṇassa hetubhūtā cintāti attho.
在经典中,由‘闻所成慧’一词,涵摄了‘那些法初善……他多闻如是法’等经文句的意义;同样,由‘如理作意’一词,涵摄了‘他如理作意“无常”’等所说的方便作意的意义。由‘正见’一词,则涵摄了‘他修习依远离的正见’等所说的正见的意义。为了说明这一点,故说:‘atha kho … pe … dassetu’。其余的,如‘法善说性’等,也是如此。显示巴利原文
Pāḷiyaṃ sutamayapaññāggahaṇena ‘‘ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā…pe… tathārūpāssa dhammā bahussutā hontī’’tiādi (a. ni. 8.2) suttapadasaṅgaho attho pariggahito, tathā yonisomanasikāraggahaṇena ‘‘so ‘anicca’nti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādinā vutto upāyamanasikāro pariggahito. Sammādiṭṭhiggahaṇena ‘‘sammādiṭṭhiṃ bhāveti vivekanissita’’ntiādinā vuttā sammādiṭṭhi pariggahitāti dassento āha ‘‘atha kho…pe… dassetu’’nti. Sesanti ‘‘dhammasvākkhātatā’’ti evamādi.
对于前面未解释其意义之处,为显示善知识性所带来的处清净及心寂止是其果,故说:‘善士……为足处’。为显示由于自身正修,厌弃罪恶与厌离等成为主要,故说:‘义……足处’。为显示善说的法,从始至终,是一切成就圆满之因,故说:‘法善说性……足处’;因为善根由此增长,直达等至之极。以僧伽之善性,即僧伽的良善状态,僧伽的敬顺状态,以及‘善哉,尊者’此语被接受的状态。其余的意义容易了知。显示巴利原文
Yassa ca pubbe attho na saṃvaṇṇito, tattha kalyāṇamittatāya āyatanagato pasādo, cittavūpasamo ca phalanti dassento ‘‘sappurisa…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti āha. Attasammāpaṇihitattā pāpajegucchinibbidādibahulova hotīti dassento āha ‘‘attha…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Dhammo svākkhāto ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā sabbasampattipāripūrihetūti dassento ‘‘dhammasvākkhātatā…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti āha. Kusalamūlaropanā hi samāpattipariyosānāti . Saṅghasuṭṭhutāya saṅghassa suṭṭhubhāvāya saṅghassa sappatissatāya ‘‘suṭṭhu, bhante’’ti vacanasampaṭicchanabhāvāya. Itaraṃ suviññeyyameva.
「Vibhattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā」的解释到此结束。显示巴利原文
Vibhattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
九、翻转义释的注释显示巴利原文
9. Parivattanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
35 在“sammādiṭṭhissa…pe… nijjiṇṇā bhavati”一句中,正如由“道正见”来说明其含义一样,由“业自性正见”与“业道正见”等也同样能获其义,因为此本为谈论业道的教导。“以所说的方式”是指如“仍未解脱”与“不解脱”所示的理趣。“因邪执的力量”是指将非正自觉者执为正自觉者,将非“导出”者执为“导出”,将不真实执为真实,将卑贱执为圣,即如此颠倒执取。“邪胜解”则是不如实的胜解,或不如实的决定。已生起的愚痴本身即是“邪解脱智见”,二者如此连结。显示巴利原文
35.Sammādiṭṭhissa…pe… nijjiṇṇā bhavatīti ettha yathā maggasammādiṭṭhivasenattho vutto, evaṃ kammassakatākammapathasammādiṭṭhīnampi vasena attho labbhateva. Kammapathakathā hesā. Yathāvuttenākārenāti ‘‘avimuttāva samānā’’ti, ‘‘avimuttiya’’nti ca vuttappakārena. Micchābhinivesavasenāti asammāsambuddhaṃ eva sammāsambuddhoti, aniyyānikaṃ eva niyyānikoti, asantaṃ eva pana santanti, anariyaṃ eva ariyoti viparītābhinivesavasena . Micchādhimokkhoti ayāthāvapasādo, ayāthāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ vā. Uppannamoho micchāvimuttiñāṇadassananti sambandho.
36 “诤随诤”意为种种诤论与随诤,即执取这些诤论。“诤随转”则指诤论及其过失的随转。显示巴利原文
36. Vādānaṃ vā anuvādā vādānuvādā, tesaṃ vādānaṃ upādāti attho. Vādānupavattiyoti vādānaṃ dosānaṃ anupavattiyo.
“两边的翻转”:即将耽著欲乐与沉溺自我折磨这两边,以对立的方式予以翻转。显示巴利原文
Antadvayaparivattananti kāmasukhaattakilamathānuyogasaṅkhātassa antadvayassa paṭipakkhavasena parivattanaṃ.
「在这些情况中」(Etesupi vāresu):即于“导出的法是他们的非法,安乐是他们的非法”这些情况中。
「依所说的方法」(Vuttanayenāti):意思是,如果自我折磨、令自己受苦可称为法,那么与法相违的便是非法,而与苦相违的便是安乐。因此,他们所证得的禅那、道、果之乐,以及无过失地依资具受用之乐(anavajjapaccayaparibhogasukha),在他们那里反而成了非法——应如此理解。
「Yaṃ yaṃ vā panātiādinā」(“任何法”等):这是对经文余下部分的探求。此处「yaṃ yaṃ vā pana dhamma」(任何法),即不论何种法——善的(kusala)或不善的(akusala),可意的(iṭṭha)或不可意的(aniṭṭha),皆如此称谓。
「喜爱或执取」(Rocayati vā upagacchati vā),是指内心喜爱它,或以见解去执取它。
「那种法的对立面」显示巴利原文
Etesupi vāresūti ‘‘niyyāniko dhammo tesaṃ adhammo, sukho tesaṃ adhammo’’ti ca imesu vāresu. Vuttanayenāti yadi attaparitāpanaṃ attano dukkhāpanaṃ dhammo, dhammassa paṭiviruddho adhammo siyā, dukkhassa ca sukhapaṭiviruddhanti jhānamaggaphalasukhassa, anavajjapaccayaparibhogasukhassa ca tesaṃ adhammabhāvo āpajjatīti evaṃ vattabbā. ‘‘Yaṃ yaṃ vā panātiādinā’’ti idaṃ avasesapāṭhāmasanaṃ. Ettha yaṃ yaṃ vā pana dhammanti yaṃ vā taṃ vā dhammaṃ, kusalaṃ vā akusalaṃ vā iṭṭhaṃ vā aniṭṭhaṃ vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rocayati vā upagacchati vāti cittena rocati, diṭṭhiyā upagacchatīti. Tassa tassa dhammassa yo paṭipakkhoti tassa tassa rucitassa, upagatassa vā dhammassa yo paṭipakkho nāma. Svassa aniṭṭhato ajjhāpanno bhavatīti yo dhammo assa rucitassa, upagatassa vā dhammassa aniṭṭhato paccanīkato abbhupagato hoti, tena paṭipakkhena desanāya parivattanaṃ parivattano hāroti attho. Tenāha ‘‘paṭipakkhassa lakkhaṇaṃ vibhāvetī’’ti.
「Parivattanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā」的解释到此结束。显示巴利原文
Parivattanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
十、同义语释的注释显示巴利原文
10. Vevacanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
37 「Aññamaññehīti」(以种种的):以不同的、不同的方式。「Āyatanti」(引生):在省察的时候。「Kathañcīti」(无论何种方式):无论用哪一种方式,如果以先前所说的方式不能通达,就以另一种方式来通达,这是它的意图。接下来是指出同义语:在一切处都这样来理解。「在那时」(Tasmiṃ khaṇe):就是同义语被说出的那个当下。「心散乱者」(Vikkhittacittānaṃ):指因种种不同的所缘而使心散乱的人。「分心他事者」(Aññavihitānaṃ):指心里想着其他事情的人。那么,为什么还须要用另一种方式去领悟那个意义呢?难道用前一种方式说出来,不能使那意义坚固吗?为了回应这个质疑,才说了「teneva」等。这里面,「与那些人相异的其他人」(tadaññesanti):是指相对于那些心散乱等的人,另外那些能够正确地领受第一句话的人。「在那里」(Tatthāti):是指对于已经说过的话,再加以重复。因为已经证得了那个意义,为了避免重复,便通过各种不同的想,来表明‘这个音声也是这个意义的能诠,那个音声也是这个意义的能诠’。这就是对应当开示的各种意义,在心中确立、安置。「在那里」(Tatthāti):即就‘法语法’的无碍解来说。播下种子(Bījāvāpanaṃ):就是成就其因。显示巴利原文
37.Aññamaññehīti aññehi aññehi. Āyatinti paccavekkhaṇakāle. Kathañcīti yena kenaci pakārena, paṭhamaṃ vuttena pariyāyena appaṭivijjhanto aparena pariyāyena paṭivijjheyyāti adhippāyo. Pariyāyavacanaṃ niddisatīti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha. Tasmiṃ khaṇeti pariyāyavacanassa vuttakkhaṇe. Vikkhittacittānanti ārammaṇantarehi vividhakhittacittānaṃ . Aññavihitānanti aññaṃ cintentānaṃ. Kasmā pana aññena pariyāyena tadatthāvabodhanaṃ, nanu tena vutte daḷhīkaraṇaṃ hotīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tenevā’’tiādi. Tattha tadaññesanti tehi vikkhittacittādīhi aññesaṃ, yehi paṭhamaṃ vacanaṃ sammadeva gahitaṃ. Tatthāti vuttavacaneneva punappunaṃ vacane. Adhigataanvatthatāya punarutti parivajjanatthaṃ visesanabhāvena tāhi tāhi saññāhipi ayampi saddo imassatthassa vācako, ayampi saddo imassatthassa vācakoti paññāpanehi. Desetabbassa tassa tassa atthassa attano citte upanibandhanaṃ ṭhapanaṃ. Tatthāti dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāyaṃ. Bījāvāpanaṃ hetusampādanaṃ.
如此,已经讲述了世尊以同义语开示时的多种利益之后,现在为了显示正因为自己是正自觉者,诸如来就会以佛陀的示现,用种种方式开示法,所以接着说‘何必多说’(kiṃ bahunā)等。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavato pariyāyadesanāyaṃ anekāni payojanāni vatvā idāni attano sammāsambuddhatāya evaṃ tathāgatā buddhalīlāya anekehi pariyāyehi dhammaṃ desentīti dassento ‘‘kiṃ bahunā’’tiādimāha.
圣典中先以‘所谓爱求(pihā),是对现在之事的希求’一语,显示它缘取现在的对象;为了进一步显示它亦缘取未来的对象,又说了‘或更殊胜的’等句,因此总结说:‘爱与爱求是以未来和现在之事为对象’(anāgatapaccuppannatthavisayā taṇhā pihā)。显示巴利原文
Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pihā nāma yā vattamānassa atthassa patthanā’’ti paccuppannavisayataṃ dassetvā puna anāgatavisayataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘seyyataraṃ vā’’tiādi vuttanti ‘‘anāgatapaccuppannatthavisayā taṇhā pihā’’ti āha.
「义成就的保护」(Atthanipphattipaṭipālanā):在这句中,正是依于‘爱求’的含义,说明了它缘取未来与现在之事的特性。显示巴利原文
Atthanipphattipaṭipālanāti imasmiṃ vā pade pihāya evatthavasena anāgatapaccuppannatthavisayabhāvadīpanato.
它只因以法为所缘而被含摄,故称为「法所缘」(dhammārammaṇa)。其中所说的「二十四句」(catuvīsati padāni),是指依家居忧寻(gehasitadomanassūpavicāra)等四类,每类各有六种,合为二十四种。显示巴利原文
Dhammārammaṇeneva saṅgahitā ‘‘dhammārammaṇa’’ntveva gahaṇaṃ gatā. Catuvīsati padānīti ettha gehasitadomanassūpavicārādīnaṃ catunnaṃ chakkānaṃ vasena catuvīsa koṭṭhāsā.
38 所谓“她是以希求的方式说出法喜等”,其含义是:那以希求的方式转起的渴爱——也就是用味著等异名来说的渴爱,对于色等诸法,以喜悦的意义而称为“法喜”;对于这些法,以珍爱的意义而称为“法爱”;以吞下、彻底确立而安住的意义,则称为“法联结”。显示巴利原文
38.Sāyeva patthanākārena dhammanandītiādimāhāti ettha ayamattho – sā eva patthanākārena pavattiyā āsādipariyāyena vuttā taṇhā rūpādidhammesu nandanaṭṭhena dhammanandī. Tesaṃ eva piyāyanaṭṭhena dhammapemaṃ. Gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā ṭhānato dhammajjhosānanti.
“以此”的意思是:不仅应当用“慧是了知”这类特有的异名来说明同义词,还应当用增上等共通的异名来说明同义词。这是其要义。依此方式,即依此异门之说。这不是用“彼世尊即是如此”等经典句式来显示教说意义的成就。“到达力之成就者”是指在十种如来力中到达了成就、圆满。“得无所畏者”:指在正觉、断障、说法、特别教诫这四方面,具足那四种称为无畏状态的智,已经到达、已经证得。显示巴利原文
Imināpīti na kevalaṃ ‘‘paññā pajānanā’’tiādiāveṇikapariyāyeneva vevacanaṃ vattabbaṃ, atha kho iminā ādhipateyyādisādhāraṇapariyāyenapi vevacanaṃ vattabbanti attho. Imināva nayenāti etena pariyāyavacanena . Na hi desanatthasādhanaṃ ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādipāḷinayadassananti dasseti. Balanipphattigatotiādīsu dasasu tathāgatabalesu nipphattiṃ pāripūriṃ gato. Sambodhipahānantarāyadesanā visesacodanāsu visāradabhāvasaṅkhātāni cattāri ñāṇāni patto adhigatoti vesārajjappatto.
特别超越了贪等志向,故称“已越志向者”。由于远离了过去因的简别等一切简别,故称为无简别的涅槃;又由于其有不动法性,或由功德而不可简别、不可算计,已到达、已进入,故称“无简别到达者”。其余文句容易理解。“应拔出”即应当提取出来。显示巴利原文
Lobhajjhāsayādiajjhāsayaṃ visesena ativattoti ajjhāsayavītivatto. Atītahetusaṅkhepādisaṅkhepavirahitatāya asaṅkhepasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ, akuppadhammatāya guṇehi vā asaṅkhepaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ gato upagatoti asaṅkhepagato. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Uddheyyanti uddharitabbaṃ.
在法随念中,应当如此理解其义——这是文句的衔接。它从轮回之苦中救护,或以寂静之乐令人喜悦,故名为“彼岸”。显示巴利原文
Dhammānussatiyaṃ evaṃ attho daṭṭhabboti sambandho. Saṃsāradukkhato pāti, santena sukhena rameti cāti vā pāraṃ.
“无前有”(abhūtapubba),意指先前未曾生起(anuppannapubba)。以此显示其恒常性,因为它不为任何天神的侵扰等所侵入、所侵害。显示巴利原文
Abhūtapubbattāti anuppannapubbattā, tenassa niccataṃva vibhāveti kenaci devatopasaggādinā anupasajjanīyattā anupasaṭṭhattā.
“Duppassa”亦是经文中的词,意为难以证得(duradhigama)。“以功德的光辉与芳香而征服”,是指凭借功德的光辉,以及功德的芳香。显示巴利原文
‘‘Duppassa’’ntipi pāḷi, duradhigamanti attho. Guṇasobhāsurabhibhāvenāti guṇehi sobhāya, sugandhibhāvena ca.
犹如一位善射刹那之机的人,依凭技艺的纯熟,在暗夜漆黑中借刹那的闪电之光,能射中极为微细、远在彼方的靶子;同样地,圣弟子依凭戒的成就,以一次证悟便通达极为微细的涅槃——即四谛法。因此说“技艺与戒,如刹那射性”。此处所举的世间譬喻,只应视为举例说明,因为对出世间法的观察也是以此为基的。显示巴利原文
Yathā akkhaṇavedhī puggalo sippanipphattiyā rattandhakāratimisāya acirakkhaṇālokena atisukhumampi dūragataṃ lakkhaṃ vijjhati, evaṃ ariyasāvako sīlasampattiyā atisukhumaṃ nibbānaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ ekapaṭivedheneva paṭivijjhatīti āha ‘‘sippañca sīlaṃ akkhaṇavedhitāyā’’ti. Lokikanti nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ lokuttaradhammaolokanassāpi adhiṭṭhānabhāvato.
第十一 施设模式的分析注释显示巴利原文
11. Paññattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
39 “世尊的自性法谈”:自己的体性是自性,由自性所生、或从自性而来,故为“自性的”;那本身就是法谈,故为“自性法谈”,意思是诸佛自赞的法谈。以彼为工具的法之开示,在“谈”与“开示”本无差别的情况下,是依隐喻而成立的区分这样说,或是依部分与整体的简择而说。因此他说:“什么是本性之谈的开示?四圣谛。”这确实是把义理与开示视为无差别而作的隐喻。那是对那个开示的安立。这就是“安立导引”,简略地说明了安立导引的自性。“那”是指如前所说的开示。“如此如此”:如同诸谛应当被开示那样,以应遍知等方式。它们应如何被开示?以应遍知等方式。“如所意欲”:符合所意欲的,也就是随顺应被教化的有缘众生的觉悟之意向。“义”:应当被开示的义理,或者就是指苦等义理。“放置”:即确立。因此在注释书中提到“四种经的安置”等。显示巴利原文
39.Bhagavato sābhāvikadhammakathāyāti attano bhāvo sabhāvo, sabhāvena nibbattā, tato vā āgatāti sābhāvikā, sā eva dhammakathāti sābhāvikadhammakathā, buddhānaṃ sāmukkaṃsikadhammakathāti attho , tāya karaṇabhūtāya dhammadesanāya anaññattepi kathādesanānaṃ upacārasiddhena bhedenevaṃ vuttaṃ, avayavasamudāyavibhāgena vā. Tenāha ‘‘kā ca pakatikathāya desanā? Cattāri saccānī’’ti. Idañhi atthassa desanāya abhedopacāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Tassā desanāya paññāpanā. Ayaṃ paññattihāroti saṅkhepeneva paññattihārassa sarūpamāha. Sāti yathāvuttadesanā. Tathā tathāti yathā yathā saccāni desetabbāni, tathā tathā. Kathañcetāni desetabbāni? Pariññeyyādippakārena. Yathādhippetanti adhippetānurūpaṃ, bodhaneyyabandhavānaṃ bodhanādhippāyānukūlanti attho. Atthanti desetabbatthaṃ, dukkhādiatthameva vā. Nikkhipatīti patiṭṭhāpeti. Yato ‘‘cattāro suttanikkhepā’’tiādi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā) aṭṭhakathāsu vuccati.
“在那里”:意思是“在安置上的开示”。“道分”:意指“从苦谛之外而存在”,这是它所要表达的意思。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti nikkhepadesanāyanti attho. Maggapakkhiyāti dukkhasaccato bahikatāti adhippāyo.
“在那一处”:指在称为“有”等的状态(处所)中。“如前所说的开示”:指如前所述,以对四食的贪等为切入点,来阐明流转(轮回)的那种开示。显示巴利原文
Yasmiṃ ṭhāneti yasmiṃ bhavādisaṅkhāte ṭhāne. Yathāvuttā desanāti caturāhārapaṭibaddharāgādimukhena vaṭṭadīpanī vuttappakārā desanā.
41 此处,“以三转的缘故”也应连接“于诸谛”。“遍知施设”,他说——应作连接。“内乐”、“得定”这两个词,通过指示所缘为“内”等方式,说明了具足定之殊胜的“内乐状态”的修习。因为单单“内”这个词,也可用于内在、内在所缘等情形。而具足内乐殊胜的定,更能卓越地说明心的安止;为显示此义,故说“具足定殊胜的”等。显示巴利原文
41.Teparivaṭṭavasenāti etthāpi ‘‘saccesū’’ti yojetabbaṃ. Pariññāpaññattīti āhāti sambandho. Ajjhattarato, samāhitoti padadvayena samādhānavisiṭṭhaṃ ajjhattaratatābhāvanaṃ dīpeti gocarajjhattatādīpanato. Kevalo hi ajjhattasaddo ajjhattajjhattagocarajjhattesupi vattati. Ajjhattaratatāvisiṭṭhañca samādhānaṃ sātisayaṃ cittaṭṭhitiṃ dīpetīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘samādhānavisiṭṭhassā’’tiādinā.
“以附着之义”:指以黏着之义。“如此显现”:如同并非真实、却似棕褐色的东西自我展示。“无相者”:即异相者。显示巴利原文
Āsajjanaṭṭhenāti āsaṅganaṭṭhena. Tathā dassananti atathābhūtassāpi bhabbarūpassa viya attano vidaṃsanaṃ. Alakkhikoti vilakkhiko.
“欲”,指欲界法。“色”,指色界法。“出离”:对于欲界法,以色界法为出离;对于色界法,则以无色界法为出离。如此,它们是有上的本质。“如此”:如同由于一切有为法具有出离,以及由于断烦恼的圣道以无为界为所缘,故无为界确实存在;同样地,通过正在阐述的理由,也说明无为界确实存在。“在某处之境界”:这是就无为界说的。“不颠倒义”:即真实义。因为,在诸如“友,当此自我完全具足五种欲功德、充分享受时,到此程度,此自我即达到最上的现法涅槃”,以及“具有现法涅槃状态者”等说法中,存在着比喻的用法。正如“狮子声”的譬喻,在“像狮子一样的年轻人”等说法中,是通过比喻用于年轻人等身上,而只有在指称兽王的真实义境界中才被如实看待;同样地,“涅槃”一词,通过比喻被用在具足欲功德、色界禅那等状态中,但在某一种境界里,它就是不颠倒的真实义。而那个不颠倒义的境界,就是无为界。为了说明:对于那些现量亲证所知(无为界)如同掌中放着余甘子一般清晰的人,只有导师的话在这里才是唯一准显示巴利原文
Kāmānanti kāmāvacaradhammānaṃ. Rūpānanti rūpāvacaradhammānaṃ. Nissaraṇanti kāmānaṃ rūpāvacaradhammā nissaraṇaṃ, tesaṃ arūpāvacaradhammā nissaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ taṃsabhāvānanti sauttarasabhāvānaṃ. Tathāti yathā saṅkhatadhammānaṃ nissaraṇabhāvato, kilesasamucchedakassa ariyamaggassa ārammaṇabhāvato ca attheva asaṅkhatā dhātu, tathā vuccamānenāpi kāraṇena attheva asaṅkhatā dhātūti dasseti. Katthaci visayeti asaṅkhatadhātuṃ sandhāya vadati. Aviparītatthoti bhūtattho. ‘‘Yato kho bho ayaṃ attā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti, ettāvatā kho bho ayaṃ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto hoti (dī. ni. 1.94), sapakaṭṭhanibbānabhāvino’’ti ca evamādīsu upacāravuttisabbhāvato. Yathā taṃ sīhasaddoti yathā ‘‘sīho māṇavako’’tiādinā māṇavakādīsu upacāravuttinā vattamāno migarāje bhūtatthavisaye diṭṭho, evaṃ nibbānasaddopi kāmaguṇarūpajjhānasamaṅgitāsu upacāravuttiyā vattamāno katthaci visaye aviparītattho. Yattha ca visaye aviparītattho, sā asaṅkhatā dhātu. Hatthatale saāmalakaṃ viya ñeyyaṃ paccakkhato passantassa ekappamāṇassa satthuvacanamevettha pamāṇanti dassento ‘‘kiṃ vā etāya yutticintāyā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Paṭiññātassa atthassa siddhiyā pakāsanāpaññattī’’ti nigamaṃ sandhāyāhāti.
12. 入理分别注疏显示巴利原文
12. Otaraṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
42 “以诸根”:此处是工具格的用法,如同“以道而行”等,以及“以斧而砍”等。“入”:即进入。显示巴利原文
42.Indriyehīti karaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ ‘‘maggena gacchatī’’tiādīsu viya, ‘‘pharasunā chindatī’’ti evamādīsu viya ca. Otaraṇāti anuppavesanā.
“在慧蕴中,以摄归的方式,如同正思惟”——这是句子的连接。为了显示:对于专修增上心者,由于信等(信、精进、念、定)正起辅助作用时,慧才完成见的作用,因此说了“信……等被说”。“而非有分”:这是为了显示那些诸行并未成为它们转起的原因。显示巴利原文
Paññākkhandhe saṅgaṇhanavasena sammāsaṅkappo viyāti yojanā. Adhicittaanuyuttānaṃ saddahanussahanupaṭṭhānasamādahanehi saddhādīsu upakarontesu eva paññā dassanakiccaṃ sādhetīti dassento ‘‘saddhā..pe… vuttānī’’ti āha. No ca bhavaṅgāti tesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ pavattikāraṇatābhāvaṃ dasseti.
43 “如所说的”指前面所讲,故称为“所依”。他从思的角度而说贪爱,因为贪爱与思相伴而行。显示巴利原文
43.Tathā vuttoti ‘‘nissayo’’ti vutto. Cetanāsīsena taṇhaṃ eva vadati cetanāsahacaraṇato.
“染污者”:指贪欲尚未被圣道所断除的人。由于这样的人被称为“染污者”,因此与其贪欲相应的乐受才被说到,因为他对那种乐受有随眠。所以他说“于乐受……等等”。其余感受的道理也是如此,故他又说“如是”等。显示巴利原文
Rattassāti maggena asamucchinnarāgassa. Yena puggalo ‘‘ratto’’ti vuccati, tassa rāgassa sambandhinī sukhā vedanā vuttā tattha tassa anusayanato. Tenāha ‘‘sukhāya…pe… vutta’’nti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tenāha ‘‘tathā’’tiādi.
“那些根”即指乐根、喜根、舍根。为了说明“属于行蕴”这一说法,他说“此处以受为头而说思”。因为受并不属于行蕴。为了显示“由于贪爱”“由于见”可以是受格或工具格,他说“由于贪爱”等。接下来,为了显示以受格来理解“由于贪爱”等的含义,他说“或者如同”等。其中,“其余法”指除了贪爱以外的其他不共法。所谓“在贪爱成为依止的状态时”,即指贪爱成为这些法的依止之时。显示巴利原文
Tāni eva indriyānīti sukhasomanassupekkhindriyāni. ‘‘Saṅkhārapariyāpannānī’’ti vacanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘idha vedanāsīsena cetanā vuttā’’ti. Na hi vedanā saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpannā hoti. Taṇhāya, diṭṭhiyāti ca upayoge karaṇavacananti dassento ‘‘taṇhāyā’’tiādimāha. Idāni upayogavaseneva ‘‘taṇhāyā’’tiādīnaṃ atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sesadhammānanti taṇhāvajjitaavisiṭṭhadhammānaṃ. Taṇhāya nissayabhāveti yadā taṇhā tesaṃ nissayo hoti.
“当贪爱成为其余诸法的缘时”,意即当其余诸法以贪爱为缘而生起时。“依于业生身”这一句,由于有身轻安,也包含了依于受等三蕴的情况。“成为原因”指辗转相续的因性。“由于贪爱与见的取著”:即由见的取著,以及与见相应的贪爱取著。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāya sesadhammānaṃ paccayabhāveti yadā sesadhammā taṇhāpaccayā honti. ‘‘Karajakāyasannissitā’’ti iminā vedanādikkhandhattayanissitāpi gahitā kāyappassaddhibhāvato. Kāraṇabhāvanti paramparahetubhāvaṃ. Taṇhādiṭṭhiupayenāti diṭṭhiupayena ca diṭṭhisahagatataṇhāupayena ca.
“到来”指此世的到来,“离去”指死后的存在——为令这两词之义更为明确,经中说“到来和离去也不存在”。此处的“去”(huranti)等,显示了门与所缘法,因为这些法是通过遮止近、远的门与所缘而被执取的。在此,于门中转起的诸法,以“在两者之间”一词的含义来表述。在“四分别理趣”中,非根所系的色法也是这样被表述的。由于成为因,即成为无间缘与亲依止缘。那些依此而被称为“我”的法,由于识等诸法不存在,而成为不生法,这就是它的含义。“于不依著者,动摇不存在”等,从逆序显示了缘性。为了说明这一点,经中在宣说“这就是苦的边际,即缘起”之后,考虑到会有问难:“难道不是‘以无明为缘而有行’等的缘起吗?”为了显示前文所述缘起的本质,便从世间与出世间的角度将缘起分为两类:“它有两种”等。如此施设,是为了达成离贪解脱,而那样的存在即是出世间的缘起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Āgatītiidhāgati, gatīti peccabhavo’’ti padadvayena vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘āgatigatīpi na bhavantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idha huranti dvārārammaṇadhammā dassitā āsannadūrabhāvehi dvārārammaṇehi vinivattetvā gahitattā. Idha dvārappavattadhammā ‘‘ubhayamantarenā’’ti padassa atthabhāvena vuttā. Catubyūhahāre pana anindriyabaddharūpadhammā tathā vuttā. Kāraṇabhūtena anantarapaccayabhūtena, upanissayapaccayabhūtena ca. Ye dhammā upādāya ‘‘attā’’ti samaññā, tesaṃ viññāṇādidhammānaṃ abhāvena anuppādadhammataṃ āpāditattāti attho. ‘‘Anissitassa calitaṃ natthī’’tiādinā paṭilomato paccayabhāvo dassitoti dassento pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘esevanto dukkhassāti paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti vatvā nanu ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādiko paṭiccasamuppādoti codanaṃ sandhāya yathāvuttassa paṭiccasamuppādabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so duvidho’’tiādinā lokiyalokuttaravasena paṭiccasamuppādo vibhatto. Tadatthatāyāti vītarāgavimuttiatthatāya. Tabbhāvanti lokuttarapaṭiccasamuppādabhāvaṃ.
十三、《净治摄分别》的注释显示巴利原文
13. Sodhanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
45 “净化”一词指的是:如同将放在手掌中的余甘子果直接显示一般,对于所问的意义,除去其隐蔽,解开其纠结,通过去除于彼对象的不知、疑惑等垢染而令清净。如此净化时,由于对词义施设了无分别的假名,故被称为“净化词句”。因此他说“名为净化词句”。此处的净化即指回答,因为他说“回答被问及的意义”。“开始”即发端,也就是教说中所阐明之义。因此他说“尚未……因为令觉悟”等。这里所说的净化,即通过教说的力量,令被覆蔽的意义显露出来。为了用比喻说明此义,他接着说“对于陷入无明者”等。显示巴利原文
45.Sodhetināmāti pucchitamatthaṃ hatthatale ṭhapitaāmalakaṃ viya paccakkhato dassento niggumbaṃ nijjaṭaṃ katvā vivaranto tabbisayaaññāṇasaṃsayādimalāpanayanena sodheti, evaṃ sodhento ca padassa atthena abhedopacāraṃ katvā ‘‘padaṃ sodheti’’cceva vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘padaṃ sodheti nāmā’’ti. Pucchāya vissajjanamevettha sodhananti āha ‘‘tadatthassa vissajjanato’’ti. Ārabhīyatīti ārambho, desanāya pakāsiyamāno attho. Tenāha ‘‘na tāva…pe… pabodhitattā’’ti. Idha sodhanaṃ nāma paṭicchannarūpassa atthassa desanānubhāvena vivaṭabhāvakaraṇanti tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘aññāṇapakkhandāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
14. 「决意理趣分别」的注释显示巴利原文
14. Adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
46 “应持”即应当保持,意为应当辨识。正如前面所说:“因为通过共相与别相的安立而成为假名,故非固定不变”等(《指导论注》第14节)。显示巴利原文
46.Dhārayitabbāti upadhāretabbā, upalakkhitabbāti attho. Vuttameva ‘‘sāmaññavisesakappanāya vohārabhāvena anavaṭṭhānato’’tiādinā (netti. aṭṭha. 14).
“种种果”即地狱等种种果报。“已行”指已去。“胎”指同一类生。因为是以同类的方式相混,故称为“胎”,也就是结生。“死后”即命终之后。“由于增盛故”是因为寻思繁多;也有说“由于增盛故”是指由于常见等而增盛。令生于阿修罗类的业,即是令阿修罗类出生之业。显示巴利原文
Taṃ taṃ phalanti nirayādiṃ taṃ taṃ phalaṃ. Añcitāti gatā. Yonīti ekajāti. Samānavasena missībhavati etāyāti hi yoni, upapatti. Peccāti maritvā. Ussannatāyāti vitakkabahulatāya. ‘‘Ussannattā’’tipi vadanti. Sassatādīhi vā ussannattā. Asurajātiyā nibbattāpanako asurajātinibbattanako.
“算”即慧。由于是以慧为主导的修习,故说:“通过审察而修习对治。”显示巴利原文
Saṅkhāti paññā. Paññāpadhānā ca bhāvanāti āha ‘‘paṭisaṅkhāya paṭipakkhabhāvanāyā’’ti.
47 因为广布的特性,所以是地。因为保持自性、无有情、无命的作用,所以是界。令吸收,或令湿润,所以是水。因为炎热的状态、炽热的状态,或者燃烧的状态,所以是火。因为推动的状态、迅速行进的状态,或者鼓动的状态,所以是风。二十种相:就是头发等二十个部分,或者二十种行相。因为发等粗硬相居多,所以说发等具有粗硬相。显示巴利原文
47. Patthaṭabhāvena pathavī. Sabhāvadhāraṇaṭṭhena, nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena ca dhātu. Āpīyati, appāyatīti vā āpo. Tejanavasena tikkhatāvasena, dahanavasena vā tejo. Vāyanavasena vegagamanavasena, samudīraṇavasena vā vāyo. Vīsati ākārāti kesādayo vīsati koṭṭhāsā, pakārā vā. Kakkhaḷalakkhaṇādhikatāya kesādī kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā vuttā.
“各别的地界部分”,即等同于地界部分,其意思纯粹是无我、无实的法。“令热恼”:此处,超越身体常态而升起的灼热,称为“热恼”;以燃烧身体而持续生起的大热恼,则称为“大热恼”,这便是二者的区别。而“由此而衰老”,意指因隔日疟等令身体衰耗的疾病而变得衰老,此义也是合理的。据称:“将酥油加热百次之后再放入水中提取,这便称为百炼酥油。”味、血、肉、脂肪、筋、骨、骨髓,即是“味等”。另有一类人则将筋除去,把白(精)说为第七界。“远离”是指变异的状态,即不相似的状态。具体来说:所谓段食,在被消化的过程中,便如同被活物食用后转变为粪尿等状态那般,与其自身不再相同;食物本身也会产生不同于原先的味等,从而进入变异的状态,这就叫作“变成远离”。同理,味等也会进入血液等不同的部分。因此,注释中才说:“以味等之变异而成为远离”。显示巴利原文
Pāṭiyekko pathavīdhātukoṭṭhāsoti pathavīkoṭṭhāsamatto, attasuññadhammamattoti attho. Santappatīti ettha sarīrapakatimatikkamitvā uṇhabhāvo santāpo, sarīradahanavasena pavatto mahādāho, ayametesaṃ viseso. Yena ca jīrīyatīti ekāhikādijarārogena jarīyatīti ca attho yujjati. ‘‘Satavāraṃ tāpetvā tāpetvā udake pakkhipitvā uddhaṭasappi satadhotasappī’’ti vadanti. Rasarudhiramaṃsamedanhāruaṭṭhiaṭṭhimiñjā rasādayo. Keci nhāruṃ apanetvā sukkaṃ sattamaṃ dhātuṃ vadanti. Vivekanti visuṃbhāvaṃ, visadisabhāvanti attho. Vatthusaṅkhāto hi āhāro pariṇāmaṃ gacchanto pāṇabhakkhagahaṇipadaniya muttakarīsabhāvehi viya attanāpi visadisarasasaṅkhātaṃ visuṃbhāvaṃ nibbattento tabbhāvaṃ gacchatīti vuccati, tathā rasādayopi rudhirādikoṭṭhāsaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘rasādibhāvena vivekaṃ gacchatī’’ti.
“由具有自相故”:意指应被辨识为不清净的特性。显示巴利原文
Sabhāvalakkhaṇatoti asucibhāvena lakkhitabbato.
48 真实味相:因可被品尝,故称为「味」——即应被通达的自性;自身之味为「自味」,真实即是自味;真实自味,复因可被标记,故称为「相」,合称「真实味相」。或说,「真实味相」即不颠倒的、关于自身转起的作用以及逼恼的相。由于无明,于『这是作用,这是相』不能了知,因为它遮蔽、覆障、全然包围而住立,阻止了关于它的智的生起,故说为无明。因此说『不令知、不令通达』。这是它的作用,故从作用的角度而说。由此,无明被称为「不通达味」。在此生起者即是「生」,即生起处。虽然在灭道中,无明并不执取所缘,然对欲了知者,因其遍覆那些非灭道,作为执取灭道之因转而现起,故说它在灭道中生起;那些非灭道也是无明的生起处,其余诸法则以所缘为因。显示巴利原文
48.Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇanti rasitabboti raso, paṭivijjhitabbo sabhāvo, attano raso saraso, yāthāvo saraso, yāthāvasaraso yāthāvasaraso eva lakkhitabbattā lakkhaṇanti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ. Atha vā yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇanti aviparītaṃ attano pavattisaṅkhātaṃ kiccañceva pīḷanasaṅkhātaṃ lakkhaṇañca. ‘‘Idaṃ kiccaṃ, idaṃ lakkhaṇa’’nti avijjāhetu ñātuṃ na sakkoti, tabbisayañāṇuppattiṃ nivārentī chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhatīti vuttā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na detī’’ti. Tayidamassā kiccanti kiccato kathitā. Kathitāti ca vuttā, yato ca avijjā asampaṭivedharasāti vuccati. Jāyati etthāti jāti, uppattiṭṭhānaṃ. Yadipi nirodhamagge avijjā ārammaṇaṃ na karoti, te pana jānitukāmassa tappaṭicchādanavasena anirodhamaggesu nirodhamaggaggahaṇassa kāraṇabhāvena pavattamānā tattha uppajjatīti vuccati, tesampi avijjāya uppattiṭṭhānatā hoti, itaresaṃ ārammaṇabhāvena cāti.
义非义:即利益与非利益。而于《迷惑冰消》中则说为『义义』,彼处『义』即是『义义』,为显示义的不颠倒性,故以第二个『义』字加以简别。因为智不会将非义执取为『义』。『因非因』亦应如此看待。或者,『义义』为叠语,为显示一切义的明了,意谓『果即是果』;于利益之同义词中亦然。Nti指义非义等。Ākāra(相)即义等因之本身。显示巴利原文
Atthānatthanti hitāhitaṃ. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ pana ‘‘atthattha’’nti (vibha. aṭṭha. 226) vuttaṃ, tattha attho eva atthatthoti atthassa aviparītatādassanatthaṃ dutiyena atthasaddena visesanaṃ. Na hi ñāṇaṃ anatthe ‘‘attho’’ti gaṇhātīti. Kāraṇākāraṇanti etthāpi evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atthatthanti vā āmeḍitavacanaṃ sabbesaṃ atthānaṃ pākaṭakaraṇabhāvappakāsanatthaṃ, phalaṃ phalanti attho, hitapariyāyepi eseva nayo. Nti atthānatthādikaṃ. Ākāranti atthādikāraṇameva.
对已通达者复再观察,名为「观察」。具有邪思惟等相之愚者性,称为「愚」。「正知」:即平等地、以种种方式了知。强烈的迷乱称为「迷乱」。周遍迷乱称为「遍迷乱」。对于引向恶趣之业,因是特殊的缘,故说为「不可得」。「得」即获得。对于无过失之法,不若明那般成为特殊之缘,故说为「不可得」,即不可获得。此乃无明之差别:亦即由『苦苦无知』等所说,从作用、生、相的角度,阐明无明之无差别性。明等诸义,当依所说之理而解。显示巴利原文
Paṭividdhassa puna avekkhanā paccavekkhaṇā. Ducintitacintitādilakkhaṇassa bālassa bhāvo bālyaṃ. Sampajānātīti samaṃ pakārehi jānāti. Balavamoho pamoho. Samantato mohanaṃ sammoho. Duggatigāmikammassa visesapaccayattā avindiyaṃ. Vindatīti labhati. Anavajjadhammānaṃ vijjā viya visesapaccayo na hotīti vindiyaṃ na vindati. Ayaṃ avijjāya vemattatāti ayaṃ ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādinā kiccajātilakkhaṇehi vutto avijjāya aviseso. Vijjātiādīnaṃ vuttanayānasārena attho veditabbo.
没有石块、砂砾和沙子的地面是柔软的,因此说“以柔软义”。显示巴利原文
Pāsāṇasakkharavālikāvirahitā bhūmi saṇhāti ‘‘saṇhaṭṭhenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
Tattakamevakālaṃ 是指五百劫。Vibhūtaṃ 意为已超越、度过的所谓“色想”之色,因此称为 vibhūtarūpaṃ,词义即定。因为没有任何无色定是与色想相伴而生起的。灭尽定就更不必说了,那里的非想非非想处定已被单独列出,故说“其余无色定”。显示巴利原文
Tattakamevakālanti pañcakappasatāni. Vibhūtaṃ samattikkantaṃ rūpasaññāsaṅkhātaṃ rūpaṃ etāyāti vibhūtarūpaṃ, samāpattinti padattho. Na hi kāci arūpasamāpatti rūpasaññāsahagatā pavattīti. Nirodhasamāpattiyaṃ vattabbameva natthi, tattha nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā visuṃ gahitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sesāruppasamāpattiyo’’ti.
“不趋向调伏”指恶性、不驯的马。“为更上的调伏”即是为了圣道的调伏。显示巴利原文
Damathaṃ anupagacchanto duṭṭhasso khaluṅkasso. Uttaridamathāyāti ariyamaggadamathāya.
「其他」是指苦行道速通达者与乐行道速通达者。「由两侧之部分」是指由色身与名身的部分。「由两方」是指依镇伏、断除与解脱的方式。显示巴利原文
Itaroti dukkhāpaṭipado khippābhiñño, sukhāpaṭipado ca khippābhiñño. Ubhayatobhāgehīti rūpakāyanāmakāyabhāgehi. Ubhayatoti vikkhambhanasamucchedavimuttivasena.
「虽多种」是指在自性上虽是多种。「由同一语词所诠」是指由通称语词所表。显示巴利原文
Anekopīti sabhāvena anekopi. Ekasaddābhidheyyatāyāti sāmaññasaddābhidheyyatāya.
第十五 资具分别的注释显示巴利原文
15. Parikkhārahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
49 为说明「Hinoti」一词的含义,因词根有多种意义,故说“成为因的状态”。「Eti」是来、生起的意思。显示巴利原文
49.‘‘Hinotī’’ti padassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘kāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchatī’’ti āha anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ. Etīti āgacchati, uppajjatīti attho.
在“无明也为因的状态”这句中,应这样理解:无明对于无间相续的无明,是以无间缘、等无间缘、亲依止缘、非有缘、离去缘、修习缘而为缘;对于同时生起的无明,则以俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘、因缘而为缘;对于非同时生起的无明,唯以亲依止缘的力量而为缘。因能产生自果,故称为因,因此说“因的状态是就果而言的”。显示巴利原文
Avijjāyapi hetubhāveti ettha avijjā anantarāya avijjāya anantarasamanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanapaccayehi, anantarāya pana sahajātāya sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatahetupaccayehi, asahajātāya upanissayakoṭiyā eva paccayo hotīti veditabbaṃ. Attano phalaṃ karotīti kāraṇanti āha ‘‘kāraṇabhāvo ca phalāpekkhāyā’’ti.
“令生的义”即是果的义,也就是称为果的义。显示巴利原文
Nibbattiattho phalattho phalasaṅkhāto attho.
所谓“自性”,是指在福等诸行中,具有造作之自性的,即是因。“其余诸句”指识等句。“如前所述的分类”即“因有不共之相”等所说的分类。“任何缘”指能生等任何一类原因。“由造作性”指直接与间接地令果生起。显示巴利原文
Yo sabhāvoti puññādiabhisaṅkhārānaṃ yo abhisaṅkharaṇasabhāvo, so hetu. Sesapadesūti viññāṇādipadesu. Yathāvuttappabhedoti ‘‘asādhāraṇalakkhaṇo hetū’’tiādinā vuttappabhedo. Yo kocipaccayoti janakādibhedaṃ yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ. Abhisaṅkharaṇatoti paccakkhato, paramparāya ca nibbattanato.
16. 安立分别的注释显示巴利原文
16. Samāropanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
50 「以经摄持」是指经中所说的内容。执取立足处,是为了显示依处之境;执取同义语,是为了显示同义语的分别——应如此连结。由于境与依处存在,也就是那被称为境的转起之处存在。「被说」意为被受用。「说」意为受用、亲近。「乞求」是请求、希求的意思。五种欲功德作为所缘缘,是欲爱的原因;执取「相」由于亲依止缘,成为执取随形好的原因。依此类推,对其余诸项也应相应说明其作为原因的性质。显示巴利原文
50.Suttena gahiteti sutte vutte. Padaṭṭhānaggahaṇaṃ adhiṭṭhānavisayadassanatthaṃ, vevacanaggahaṇaṃ adhivacanavibhāgadassanatthanti yojanā. Visayādhiṭṭhānabhāvatoti visayasaṅkhātapavattiṭṭhānabhāvato. Vanīyatīti bhajīyati. Vanatīti bhajati sevati. Vanuteti yācati, patthetīti attho . Pañca kāmaguṇā kāmataṇhāya kāraṇaṃ hoti ārammaṇapaccayatāya. Nimittaggāho anubyañjanaggāhassa kāraṇaṃ hoti upanissayatāyāti evaṃ sesesupi yathārahaṃ kāraṇatā vattabbā.
51 于「于身随观身而住」等处,所应了知的道理,可依下文《相摄义分注释》中所说的方法来理解。不过此处有一差别:为了遍知色法,也就是为了遍知那以色为所依的识住。显示巴利原文
51.‘‘Kāye kāyānupassī viharāhī’’tiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 23) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – rūpadhammapariññāyāti rūpūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya.
视之为「苦」,那便是受随观,应如此连结。对受因的遍知,即是对触的遍知。「由受之力」这一词,是指由自身所生的苦之力。对受的遍知,即是对以受为所依的识住的遍知。这里的用意是:因为它是常执的对立面,故为无常随观。「常想之相」是指以常想为因的。对想的遍知,即是对以想为所依的识住的遍知。由于应被初道所断除,所以说「于见执著……乃至……于非道行」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dukkha’’nti passantī sā vedanānupassanāti yojetabbaṃ. Vedanāhetupariññāyāti phassapariññāya. ‘‘Vedanāvasenā’’ti padena attanā uppāditadukkhavasena. Vedanāpariññāyāti vedanūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya. Niccābhinivesapaṭipakkhato aniccānupassanāyāti adhippāyo. Niccasaññānimittassāti niccasaññāhetukassa. Saññāpariññāyāti saññūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya. Paṭhamamaggavajjhattā agatigamanassa vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhābhinivesassa…pe… agatigamanassa cā’’ti.
对行的遍知,即是对以行为依处的识住之遍知。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhārapariññāyāti saṅkhārūpikaviññāṇaṭṭhitipariññāya.
一、开示摄落脚处注释显示巴利原文
1. Desanāhārasampātavaṇṇanā
「这样」等语,是显示与摄义集的开示之间的连结。其中,前两个譬喻显示:巴利圣典如同经过善巧打磨的宝石地面,又如精心打造成的阎浮金饰。而摄义分解的开示,则如同在那里善加制作、恭敬供奉的种种彩色花鬘,又如以各色光线交织闪耀、镶嵌种种宝珠而成的璎珞。最后的譬喻,则彰显它结合了殊胜、极应尊重之事后,那更为难得的一面。所说的这首偈颂,便是总结性的连结。显示巴利原文
‘‘Eva’’ntiādi hārasampātadesanāya sambandhadassanaṃ. Tattha purimena upamādvayena suparikammakatamaṇikoṭṭimasadisī, suviracitajambunadābharaṇasadisī ca pāḷi. Tattha katanānāvaṇṇapupphūpahārasadisī, vividharaṃsijālāsamujjalabaddhanānāratanāvalisadisī ca hāravibhaṅgadesanāti dasseti. Pacchimena tassa paṇītamahārahe jaṭāhi saddhiṃ dukkaratarataṃ dīpeti. Yāyaṃ gāthā vuttāti yojanā.
52 因为此「摄义分解品」并不如前所说的理由那样适用,所以其意趣是:在该品开头并未引用那首偈颂。然而,「摄义集品」却引用了该偈颂——正因「摄义集品」依同一理由而引用该偈颂,故说了“十六……乃至……食”。「显示连接的方法」即是指展示连接的方法。显示巴利原文
52. Yasmāyaṃ hāravibhaṅgavāro nappayojeti yathāvuttena kāraṇena, tasmā sā hāravibhaṅgavārassa ādimhi na paccāmaṭṭhāti adhippāyo . Hārasampātavāro pana taṃ payojetīti yasmā pana hārasampātavāro taṃ gāthaṃ payojeti yathāvutteneva kāraṇena, tasmā ‘‘soḷasa…pe… āhā’’ti āha. Yojanānayadassananti yojanāya nayadassanaṃ.
「以此」即指「彼死魔之句」这一说法。「一切颠倒」即十二种颠倒。「共相……乃至……被说为」的意思是:共相所安立之处,即是殊胜。然而从义理上而言,想等正是以色等为所缘,以颠倒的方式执取,故称为颠倒。为显示此义,便说「想颠倒」等。显示巴利原文
Tenāti ‘‘taṃ maccuno pada’’nti vacanena. Sabbaṃ vipallāsanti dvādasavidhampi vipallāsaṃ. Sāmaññassa…pe… voharīyati yattha patiṭṭhitaṃ sāmaññaṃ, so viseso. Atthato pana saññādayo eva rūpādivisayaṃ viparītākārena gaṇhante vipallāsoti dassento ‘‘saññāvipallāso’’tiādimāha.
当五取蕴以因陀罗网等方式、显现为摩尼宝等相时,由于我、我所等原因,依词源学的方法被称为「我」;又因它是那类认知与言说生起的所依相,故称为「有身」;因是乐等的依处,故被说为「有身依处」——因此说「由他们」等来开示。「他们」指的是诸取蕴。颠倒的活动方式是「于不净为净」等。它的范围是身、受、心、法。而无明……乃至……正因为以迷乱为先导,所以是一切颠倒的根源。「且」字也应连接到「净乐想」这里。显示巴利原文
Indajālādivasena maṇiādiākārena upaṭṭhahante upādānakkhandhapañcake ahaṃmamādikāraṇatāya niruttinayena ‘‘attā’’ti vuccamāno taṃbuddhivohārappavattinimittatāya attabhāvo sukhādīnaṃ vatthutāya ‘‘attabhāvavatthū’’ti pavuccatīti āha ‘‘tehī’’tiādi. Tesanti upādānakkhandhānaṃ. Vipallāsānaṃ pavattiākāro ‘‘asubhe subha’’ntiādi. Visayo kāyavedanācittadhammā. Avijjā ca…pe… eva sammohapubbakattā sabbavipallāsānaṃ. Ca-saddo subhasukhasaññānanti etthāpi ānetvā yojetabbo.
此处的连接方式是:「无明既是净乐想的缘,不唯是爱;无明也是净乐想的缘,不唯是常我想的缘。」虽然如此,为显示前两种颠倒想以爱为殊胜缘,后两种以无明为殊胜缘,便说「即使这样」等。这里,以无明为代表,应知是取邪见。因此说「被见所覆的心」、「那是见颠倒」等。正如以无明为代表而包含邪见,以见为代表也可以包含无明,所以又说「以见为代表说无明」。在爱与无明二者中,净乐想以爱为殊胜缘,并不以无明为殊胜缘;而常我想则以无明为殊胜缘,不以爱为殊胜缘。为显示此义,说「迷为殊胜缘」。}显示巴利原文
Tatthāyaṃ yojanā – ‘‘avijjā ca subhasukhasaññānaṃ paccayo eva, na taṇhā eva, avijjā subhasukhasaññānañca paccayo, na niccaattasaññānaṃ evā’’ti. Evaṃ santepi purimānaṃ dvinnaṃ viparītasaññānaṃ taṇhā, pacchimānaṃ avijjā visesapaccayoti dassento āha ‘‘tathāpī’’tiādi. Avijjāsīsena cettha diṭṭhiyā gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhinivutaṃ citta’’nti , ‘‘yo diṭṭhivipallāso’’ti ca ādi, yathā ca avijjāsīsena diṭṭhiyā gahaṇaṃ, evaṃ diṭṭhisīsena avijjāyapi gahaṇaṃ siyāti āha ‘‘diṭṭhisīsena avijjā vuttā’’ti. Taṇhāvijjāsu subhasukhasaññānaṃ yathā taṇhā visesapaccayo, na evaṃ avijjā. Niccaattasaññānaṃ pana yathā avijjā visesapaccayo, na tathā taṇhāti dassento ‘‘moho visesapaccayo’’ti āha.
后二种……乃至……成为,这是由于对过去分爱著的强力状态并不存在。正因如此,经中唯说“他观过去色为我”,而不说“欢喜”。“爱颠倒”是指依爱而转起的颠倒,爱本身并非颠倒。因此说“以爱为根的颠倒”。“依见欢喜”是指依爱为资粮的见欢喜,由此说为“爱颠倒”。“以此”指“那爱颠倒”等文句。十六种有想论、八种无想论、八种非想非非想论以及五种认为最上现法涅槃论,他们通过设想自己已到达、已证入涅槃的方式,而执取净、乐之相;七种断灭论者则不如此,所以说“大多数”。也可以从对立面的角度,即从清净的角度来说。只要还有随烦恼,心就不清净;当那些随烦恼被断除时,心才清净。因此说“不……”等。搁置“以不防护之心”的经文,由于通过颠倒之门的开示被导出,所以说“依随顺的连接来完成偈颂”。显示巴利原文
Pacchimānaṃ dvinnaṃ…pe… hotīti atītaṃse taṇhābhinivesassa balavabhāvābhāvato. Teneva hi ‘‘so atītaṃ rūpaṃ attato samanupassati’’cceva vuttaṃ, na ‘‘abhinandatī’’ti. Taṇhāvipallāsoti taṇhaṃ upanissāya pavatto vipallāso, na hi taṇhā sayaṃ vipallāso. Tenāha ‘‘taṇhāmūlako vipallāso’’ti. Diṭṭhābhinandanavasenāti taṇhupanissayadiṭṭhābhinandanavasena, yato so ‘‘taṇhāvipallāso’’ti vutto. Etenāti ‘‘yo taṇhāvipallāso’’tiādipāṭhena. Soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā, aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā, pañca paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā ca, yathā attano gatāya, nibbānappattiyā ca parikappavasena subhasukhākāraggāhino, na evaṃ satta ucchedavādāti āha ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti. Paṭipakkhavasenapīti visuddhivasenapi. Yāva hi upakkilesā, tāva cittaṃ na visujjhateva. Yadā ca te pahīnā, tadā visuddhameva. Tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. ‘‘Arakkhitena cittenā’’ti pāḷiṃ nikkhipitvā vipallāsamukheneva desanāya niddhāriyamānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘yathānusandhināva gāthaṃ niṭṭhapetu’’nti.
“魔罗的”指烦恼魔罗。因为处于此魔罗的控制下,即等于落入其余魔罗手中,故说“由取烦恼魔罗即可”等。显示巴利原文
Mārassāti kilesamārassa. Tassa hi vase ṭhito sesamārānaṃ hatthagato evāti. Tenāha ‘‘kilesamāraggahaṇenevā’’tiādi.
“魔罗的束缚”:就众生魔罗方面而言,魔罗的束缚称为魔罗的束缚。因为他将那是烦恼束缚的,连同自己的魔罗众,执以为我。故说“内在……乃至……将解脱”。就其余魔罗方面而言,魔罗本身就是束缚,故称魔罗的束缚。脱离造作即是涅槃。显示巴利原文
Mārabandhananti sattamārapakkhe mārassa bandhananti mārabandhanaṃ. So hi kilesabandhanabhūte attano samārakaparise maññati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘antali…pe… mokkhasī’’ti (mahāva. 33). Itaramārapakkhe mārova bandhananti mārabandhanaṃ. Visaṅkhāro nibbānaṃ.
与痴相应之心,称为‘迷’。即使有贪、嗔时,迷亦存在,但此处将‘迷’作为单独的词,为的是表示特有的痴。为说明此点,故说‘依两种迷痴心生起’。‘如此’:指由于获得贪等不善,截断善财,心便成为不防护;一切邪执皆归入此处,归结于此,故说‘邪见……乃至……应知’。‘一切’即指‘不防护’、‘被邪见所毁’、‘被昏沉睡眠所胜’这三句所说的所有法。显示巴利原文
Mohasampayogato cittaṃ ‘‘mūḷha’’nti vuttanti rattaduṭṭhānampi mūḷhatāya sabbhāve ‘‘mūḷha’’nti visuṃ vacanaṃ āveṇikamohavasena vuttanti dassento ‘‘dvinnaṃ momūhacittuppādānaṃ vasenā’’ti āha. Evanti evaṃ rāgādiakusalappattiyā kusalabhaṇḍacchedanato arakkhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, sabbopi micchābhiniveso ettheva saṅgahaṃ samosaraṇaṃ gacchatīti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhi…pe… veditabba’’nti. Sabbepīti ‘‘arakkhitaṃ, micchādiṭṭhihataṃ, thinamiddhābhibhūta’’nti tīhipi padehi vuttadhammā.
‘眼’指眼门。‘色’指依托于异熟所依的色处。‘执取相’,指执取假想的相,即执取‘这是女人’‘这是男人’‘这是净的’‘这是不净的’等概念,或指具有这种执取习惯。‘执取随形好’,指执取诸如手、足、笑、谈等种种细节——烦恼随这些细节而生起,故称它们为随形好;即执取此类随形好的相,或指具有这种执取习惯。‘由于什么原因’:即指那个执取的相,意思是由于执取相和随形好而产生的因。因此,当说到‘眼根不防护而住’时,那个被称作‘执取相、执取随形好’的人,他的眼根、眼门便是不防护的,即未以正念作为门闩将眼门关好,而任由它散逸。对于那个色,如果执取可爱的相状,便生起贪欲;执取不可爱的相状,便生起忧;不普遍作意观察,便生起痴;有邪执著,便生起邪见。如此,贪欲、嗔恨,以及其他因其低劣而称为恶、因其由不善巧所生而称为不善的法,便会随之不断地生起、流转下去。显示巴利原文
Cakkhunāti dvārena. Rūpanti visabhāgavatthusannissitaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ. Nimittaggāhīti ‘‘itthī’’ti vā puriso’’ti vā ‘‘subha’’nti vā ‘‘asubha’’nti vā parikappitanimittaṃ gaṇhāti, tassa vā gahaṇasīlo. Anubyañjanaggāhīti hatthapādahasitakathitādippabhede kilesānaṃ anu anu byañjanato anubyañjanasaññite ākāre gaṇhāti, tesaṃ vā gahaṇasīlo. Yatvādhikaraṇanti yaṃ nimittaṃ, nimittānubyañjanaggahaṇanimittanti attho. Evaṃ ‘‘cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutaṃ viharanta’’nti, yo ‘‘nimittaggāhī, anubyañjanaggāhī’’ti ca vutto puggalo, tamenaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ cakkhudvāraṃ asaṃvutaṃ satikavāṭena apihitaṃ katvā vattantaṃ, tassa ca rūpassa iṭṭhākāraggahaṇe abhijjhā, aniṭṭhākāraggahaṇe domanassaṃ, asamapekkhane moho micchābhinivese micchādiṭṭhīti evaṃ abhijjhābyāpādā, aññe ca lāmakaṭṭhena pāpakā akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṃ anu anu pavatteyyuṃ.
‘不为彼防护而实行’:指为了用正念的门闩关好眼门而应作的防护,他并未去实践。为了显示这种不实践就是眼根无保护、不防护的不生起,故说‘不保护……乃至……进入’。实际上,即使在速行中生起的不防护,由于它是经由那一道门活动的,所以也称为‘眼根不防护’。对其余根门,也应按已说之理,理解其义。‘并依前际施设’等,是指为了详细说明前面略说的道理,先以‘略说与详说不同’作区分,再总结这些义理,于是便说了‘这些诸……’等文句。显示巴利原文
Tassa saṃvarāya na paṭipajjatīti tassa cakkhudvārassa saṃvarāya satikavāṭena pidahanatthaṃ na paṭipajjati. Sā pana appaṭipatti cakkhundriyassa anārakkhāsaṃvarassa anuppādoti dassento ‘‘na rakkhati…pe… āpajjatī’’ti āha. Javane uppajjamānopi hi asaṃvaro tena dvārena pavattanato ‘‘cakkhundriyāsaṃvaro’’tveva vuccatīti. Sesadvāresupi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. ‘‘Pubbantakappanavasena cā’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassento ‘‘saṅkhepato ca vitthāro añño’’ti katvā taṃ samuccinanto ‘‘yā ca kho imā’’tiādimāha.
“如所说的不善法”:指十二种不善心生起之法,或这些不善法的所依处。这些也就是除去“集”的五取蕴。“如是”一词,是依《导论》巴利原文及其注疏所确立的方式来使用的。“这里”是指在这首“以无护之心……”的偈颂中。显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttā akusalā dhammāti dvādasa akusalacittuppādadhammā, tesaṃ vatthūni vā. Te hi samudayavajjā pañcupādānakkhandhā. ‘‘Eva’’nti iminā nettipāḷiyaṃ, aṭṭhakathāyañca niddhāritappakārena. Idhāti imissaṃ ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti gāthāyaṃ.
虽然在《教导涵摄》的巴利文中,并未照录“所以,有护心者……”这首偈颂,但就义理而言,它已通过“世尊为了遍知他们……”等文句而被涵摄。为阐明此偈实已被引用,故先以“如何开示?”提问,再引出“所以,有护心者……”这首偈颂。显示巴利原文
Yadipi desanāhārasampātapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti gāthā sarūpato na gahitā, atthato pana ‘‘tesaṃ bhagavā pariññāyā’’tiādinā gahitā evāti tassā gahitabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kathaṃ desetī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti gāthaṃ uddhari.
“以如理作意而作业者”:是指如“他如理作意‘这是苦’……”等方法所说,以称为观的如理作意,而作修习之业,意为“正在修习”。“如实智”:是依知遍知的前行观,以“由无明集故有色集,由无明灭故有色灭”等五十种行相,而如实知见。为了指出地狱趣属于苦苦的苦性,善趣的胜处与梵天界某部分属于行苦的苦性,其余之处则具足二苦或三苦,故说“随其所应,与三种苦性相连”。显示巴利原文
Yonisomanasikārena kammaṃ karontoti ‘‘so ‘idaṃ dukkha’nti yoniso manasi karotī’’tiādinā nayena vipassanāsaṅkhātena yonisomanasikārena bhāvanākammaṃ karonto, bhāventoti attho . Yathābhūtañāṇanti ñātapariññāya pubbabhāgavipassanāya ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo, avijjānirodhā rūpanirodho’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.50) samapaññāsāya ākārehi. Nirayagatiyaṃ dukkhadukkhatā, sugativisese brahmalokekadese saṅkhāradukkhatā, itarattha dve tissopīti dassento āha ‘‘yathāsambhavaṃ tividhadukkhatāyogenā’’ti.
二、《探究涵摄》解说显示巴利原文
2. Vicayahārasampātavaṇṇanā
53 “以善法为所缘”:这是仅就为追求善法而生起(渴爱)的情况而说,并非指善法成为所缘缘,因为这里的“善法”意指的出世间法。实际上,不被执取的法,任何时候都不会成为执取的所缘。由于执着于果法而生起的渴爱被执取,所以才说“善……应被见”。这是《教导涵摄》中所说。问难者只是执著一个“善”字便质问:“那它怎么会是善的呢?”这应看作仅是举例罢了。此外,它也是断除烦恼的因,这一点想必问难者也会认可。接着通过“慢也有两种”等文句,说明慢与那种渴爱之所以应被修习,是因为它们是断除不善法、生起善法的助缘。显示巴利原文
53.Kusaladhammārammaṇāti kusaladhamme uddissa pavattimattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tesaṃ ārammaṇapaccayataṃ idha ‘‘kusalā dhammā’’ti lokuttaradhammānaṃ adhippetattā. Na hi kadāci anupādāniyā dhammā upādānārammaṇā honti. Phaladhamme uddissa pavattāya taṇhāya gahitattā ‘‘kusala…pe… daṭṭhabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Desanāhāreti desanāhārasampāte. Kathaṃ pana kusalabhāvoti ‘‘kusalā’’ti vacanamattaṃ gahetvā codeti, tañca nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, pahānahetubhāvopissā siyā codakena sampaṭicchitova. ‘‘Mānopi duvidho’’tiādinā mānassa ca tassā taṇhāya ca sevitabbabhāvo akusalānaṃ pahānāya, kusalānaṃ uppattiyā ca paccayabhāvato.
“依于出离的忧”:是指因懊悔“我未能证得圣位”而生起的忧;这是它与前文的关联。“如是”:这是依照巴利经文所说的方法,将文句连接如下:先令希求现起,当悦意的所缘在六门中现前时,以无常等角度安立观。此处所说的“悦意的所缘”,是为了说明前面那种懊悔忧之所以生起,是因为所执取的对象实际上并不可意。为了阐明“如何依出离之义”这句话的含义,才说“依观之力”等。或者说,除了观之外,以初禅等方式所说的善法,在这里即是“出离”。由于提及“随念”已经包含了近行定,所以说“以初禅等之力”。其中的“等”字,收摄了从第二禅以上直至最胜果的一切更殊胜之法。也就是那慧解脱。显示巴利原文
Nekkhammassitaṃ domanassaṃ nāma ‘‘ariyabhūmiṃ pāpuṇituṃ nāsakkhi’’nti anusocato uppannaṃ domanassanti sambandho. Evanti iminā pāḷiyaṃ vuttappakārena, pihaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā chasu dvāresu iṭṭhārammaṇe āpāthagate aniccādivasena vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvāti yojanā. Iṭṭhārammaṇañcettha yathāvuttaanusocanadomanassuppattīnaṃ yathābhiniviṭṭhassa ārammaṇassa aniṭṭhatāyāti dassanatthaṃ. ‘‘Kathaṃ nekkhammavasenā’’ti padassa atthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘vipassanāvasenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vipassanādivinimuttā vā paṭhamajjhānādivasena vuttā kusalā dhammā idha nekkhammaṃ. Anussatiggahaṇena upacārajjhānameva gahitanti ‘‘paṭhamajjhānādivasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddena dutiyajjhānato paṭṭhāya yāva aggaphalā uparivisesā saṅgahitā. Yāya paññāvimuttiyā.
“以舍、念清净故”:意思是具有由舍所生的念清净之本性。“业相应”:指适合、相应、契合于观修等业。“不信”:以不信为因,也可读作“由不信”,义同。“入于光明”:指入于智慧的光明。虽然前面已提到慧,但为了显示不仅以不信等,而且以其他烦恼的摧破亦由慧成就,并且此慧即是如此状态,故说:“入光明者,于烦恼黑暗中不动摇”。显示巴利原文
Upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvenāti upekkhājanitasatipārisuddhisabbhāvena. Kammayogganti vipassanābhāvanādikammassa yoggaṃ anurūpaṃ anucchavikaṃ. Assaddhiyeti assaddhiyahetu, ‘‘assaddhiyenā’’tipi paṭhanti, so evattho. Obhāsagatanti ñāṇobhāsagataṃ. Kāmaṃ pubbepi paññā vuttā, assaddhiyādīhi pana aññesaṃ kilesānaṃ vidhamanampi paññāya eva hoti, sā ca evaṃbhūtāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘obhāsagataṃ kilesandhakāre na iñjatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“愤怒”即嗔,“无因缘的忧”即忧受。神变智等六神通为人所共知,故为说明“二种殊胜”所含摄的法,注释才说“意所成神变与观智”。“垢染”指贪等烦恼,“随烦恼”指恶欲、极度贪等。“随顺”即与彼共处一境。心的悸动,其微细者为散乱生起,其猛利者为不能安住。一切邪执皆以不如理作意与邪思维为根源。此处,不如理作意是不善心的生起,与之相应的邪思维则伴随着散乱,因此说“是邪执之因,属于见的一面”,也因此说“思维亦是见的立足处,不如理作意亦是见的立足处”。显示巴利原文
Kopo kodho. Appaccayo domanassaṃ. Iddhividhañāṇādikā cha abhiññā pākaṭā evāti ‘‘dve ca visese’’ti vuttadhamme dassetuṃ ‘‘manomayiddhi, vipassanāñāṇañcā’’ti āha. Aṅgaṇāni rāgādayo. Upakkilesā abhijjhāvisamalobhādayo. Anulomanaṃ tadekaṭṭhatā. Phandanā dubbalā vikkhepappavatti. Balavatī anavaṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbo micchābhiniveso ayonisomanasikārena hoti, micchāvitakkena ca. Tattha ayonisomanasikāro akusalacittuppādo tappariyāpanno micchāvitakko vikkhepasahito evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘micchābhinivesahetutāya diṭṭhipakkho’’ti vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘vitakkopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, ayoniso manasikāropi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.124).
或者也可这样理解:“动摇”即心的那种悸动,是依于见的恐惧。正如经中所说:“那些不知、不见的沙门和婆罗门,他们的感受已落入渴爱,便只是在那里恐惧与悸动罢了。”“不安住”即不能安住,是依于见的思维。正因如此,凡夫时才执取常见,时而执取断见,不断卷入种种邪执之中,犹如被牵来牵去的盲牛,犹如被弃海中随风浪漂泊的船,又犹如被缚在机械上的牛,就这样漫无目的地四处流转。因此才说“见也是见的立足处,思维也是见的立足处”。而在这一层解释中,邪执本身与邪执之因是它的两个面向,故应理解为这是一种以部分面貌提示其余整体的省略说法。显示巴利原文
Atha vā iñjanāti phandanā, diṭṭhaparittāso. Yathāha ‘‘tadapi tesaṃ bhavataṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ajānataṃ apassataṃ vedayitaṃ taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphanditamevā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.105 ādayo). Aṭṭhitīti anavaṭṭhānaṃ, diṭṭhivitakko. Tena hi puthujjano kāle sassataṃ, kāle ucchedanti taṃ taṃ diṭṭhiggahaṇaṃ pakkhandanto sattato paribbhaṭṭhaandho viya, samudde vissaṭṭhavāhanikā viya, yante yuttagoṇo viya ca tathā tathā paribbhamati. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhiyopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, vitakkopi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.124) ca. Etasmiñca pakkhe micchābhinivesatāya, micchābhinivesahetutāya ca tassā dve pakkhāti ekadesasarūpekaseso katoti veditabbaṃ.
“如是”等词,是为了显示此句与“那个上方的”等巴利经文之间的关联。为了表明“嗔恚想”一词是处格意义的转成词,注释才说“在嗔恚想等之中”。“色界想”:这是以“想”为标举,指称色界的禅那。“种种想”:指种种自性之想,或于种种自性的所缘上生起的想。除嗔恚想之外,其余的欲界想便是这些。“他超越了那些”:意即他连同那些色想、种种想及其所缘,悉皆彻底地超越了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Eva’’ntiādinā ‘‘so uparima’’ntiādipāḷiyaṃ sambandhaṃ dasseti. Paṭighasaññāti bhummatthe paccattavacananti dassento ‘‘paṭigha…pe… saññāsū’’ti āha. Rūpāvacarasaññāti saññāsīsena rūpāvacarajjhānāni vadati. Nānattasaññāti nānāsabhāvā, nānāsabhāve vā ārammaṇe saññā. Ṭhapetvā paṭighasaññā avasiṭṭhakāmāvacarasaññā hetā. Tā samatikkamatīti tā rūpasaññānānattasaññāyo ārammaṇehi saddhiṃ sammadeva atikkamati.
色界禅那的光明同样以遍为所缘,因为无色界禅那的生起正是遍业处的流衍。「见」指对遍色的看见。与断除贪欲、嗔恚一同发起的精进、作为助力的止,以及念与轻安,前面已说为修观的资具。既然不存在没有念的思择,所以才说“那现前而不忘失的念,这就是观”,以此显示以念为首来统摄观。此处上下文的关联在于:这是为了说明断除迷乱。显示巴利原文
Rūpāvacarajjhānobhāsopi kasiṇārammaṇā. Kasiṇanissando hi āruppajjhānuppatti. Dassananti kasiṇarūpānaṃ dassanaṃ. Abhijjhābyāpādappahānena saddhiṃ vīriyārambho upakārako samatho satipassaddhiyo parikkhāraṅgatā vuttā eva. Satirahitaṃ sammasanaṃ nāma natthīti ‘‘yā upaṭṭhitā sati asammuṭṭhā, ayaṃ vipassanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena satisīsena vipassanā gahitāti dasseti. Sammosānaṃ pahānamāhāti sambandho.
54 正是基于现法乐、未来乐果、无漏、非劣士所修习这些性质,经中才对这个定说出了寂静、殊胜等其余种种差别,而这些意义此处已全部收摄。为了阐明这些词句的涵义,注释说“由于支的寂静性”等。其中,“由于支的寂静性”是指果定禅那诸支已得寂静。“由于烦恼尘垢的寂静性”是指烦恼尘垢已经止息。“殊胜”即广大、崇高。“以心一境性”即以那称为道定的心一境性,所谓心一境性就是心安住于一处。对于世间定而言,必须镇伏它的敌对法,也就是五盖以及对初禅的爱着等,还需遮止其他烦恼。而对于这阿拉汉果的定,因为烦恼已经止息,既没有应镇伏的对象,也没有应遮止的对象,所以它是在道心之后、在等至的刹那无需功用便证得的;又因它安住且以不退失的方式证得,所以它并不处于“需以加行来镇伏和遮止”的状态。显示巴利原文
54. Paccuppannasukhaāyatisukhavipākakiriyanirāmisaakāpurisasevitabhāvehi eva sesā pāḷiyaṃ etassa samādhissa santapaṇītatādivisesā vuttā, tepi idha saṅgahitāti tesaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ dassento ‘‘aṅgasantatāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha aṅgasantatāyāti phalajhānaṅgānaṃ upasantatāya. Kilesadarathasantatāyāti kilesadarathapaṭippassaddhiyā. Paṇītoti uḷāro. Ekodibhāvenāti maggasamādhisaṅkhātena ekodibhāvena. Ekodibhāvanti samādhānaṃ. Lokiyasamādhissa paccanīkanīvaraṇapaṭhamajjhānanikantiādīni niggahetabbāni, aññe ca kilesā vāretabbā. Imassa pana arahattasamādhissa paṭippassaddhakilesattā na niggahetabbaṃ, vāretabbañca atthīti so maggānantaraṃ samāpattikkhaṇeva appayogeneva adhigatattā, ṭhitattā ca aparihānivasena vā adhigatattā nasasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato.
“成为念增广者”:这是说,即使念并未相续生起,由于念极为丰足,仍可称为具念者。“依如此限定的时间而言”:这是说,因为具备有所限定的念,所以称为具念者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sativepullappatto’’ti etena appavattamānāyapi satiyā satibahulatāya sato eva nāmāti dasseti. ‘‘Yathāparicchinnakālavasenā’’ti etena paricchinnasatiyā satoti dasseti.
“将说”(vakkhamānena)者,是指紧接着后文将要述及的“喜遍满性”等。然而,经文中出现的则是“喜遍满性”一词。此乃就“五支正定”(《长部》3.355)中定支的状态,说明慧已被标示出来,因此才这样说。正因如此,在注疏中才对“喜遍满性”等词的含义作了解释。在那里,应依“他以由远离所生的喜与乐,灌注、滋润此身”(《长部》1.226)等理路,来理解喜的遍满与乐的遍满。其余的部分则容易了知。显示巴利原文
Vakkhamānenāti ‘‘pītipharaṇā’’tiādinā anantaraṃ vakkhamānena. ‘‘Pītipharaṇatā’’ti pana pāḷi āgatā. Taṃ ‘‘pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.355) samādhiaṅgabhāvena paññā uddiṭṭhāti katvā vuttaṃ. Tato eva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘pītipharaṇatā’’tiādīnañca atthasaṃvaṇṇanā katā. Tattha ‘‘so imameva kāyaṃ vivekajena pītisukhena abhisandetī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.226) nayena pītiyā, sukhassa ca pharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
“Samādhivasena samatho uddhaṭo”,意即:止(samatha)是就定的本身而被举出,并非从助益法的角度而被举出。这是它的意趣所在。显示巴利原文
Samādhivasena samatho uddhaṭoti sabhāvavasena samatho uddhaṭo, na upakārakadhammavasenāti adhippāyo.
55 55. 由于定是与贪对立的,因此说(有贪行者)“于增上心学修学”。所谓“依前所说之理”,即“通过消除乐愿等而成无愿”等。在此应当了知:对于如实彻见诸行刹那坏灭性的人,贪欲便无立足处,因此无常随观被说为适合贪行者;同样地,对于如实彻见诸行自性是苦的人,对于本性已是苦的事物再施加苦痛,犹如向伤口浇灌碱水,嗔恨便无立足处,因此苦随观被说为适合嗔行者;同样地,当诸行被如实解析、破除了密集的假相,而无我的空性显现时,愚痴便无立足处,因此无我随观被说为适合痴行者。因为定与贪相违,所以说“于增上心学修学”。这一道理也适用于其余二者。此处,剩余的内容容易了知。显示巴利原文
55. Rāgapaṭipakkhattā samādhissa ‘‘adhicittasikkhāya sikkhanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Vuttanayānusārenāti ‘‘sukhapaṇidhiādisamugghāṭanena appaṇihito’’tiādinā. Ettha ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgurataṃ sammadeva passantassa na rāgo patiṭṭhaṃ labhatīti aniccānupassanā rāgacaritassa sappāyā vuttā, tathā saṅkhārānaṃ sabhāvadukkhataṃ sammadeva passantassa pakatiyāpi dukkhitesu dukkhuppādanaṃ vaṇe khārodakasekasadisanti na doso patiṭṭhaṃ labhatīti dukkhānupassanā dosacaritassa sappāyā vuttā, tathā saṅkhāresu sammadeva ghanavinibbhoge kate attasuññatāya upaṭṭhahamānāya na moho patiṭṭhaṃ labhatīti anattānupassanā mohacaritassa sappāyā vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Rāgapaṭipakkhattā samādhissa ‘‘adhicittasikkhāya sikkhanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo itaresu. Sesamettha suviññeyyaṃ.
多修忍耐者,能克服已生起的不悦、不喜而安住,由此易于证得定,因此以忍耐为首要,也被说为是倾向止分者的原因。“精进得以成就”是指身体方面的精进得以圆满。经中所说的身行等分类,对正业与正精进而言,应知是基于此二者之身体力行而产生的。显示巴利原文
Khantibahulo uppannaṃ aratiṃ anabhiratiṃ abhibhuyya viharanto sukhena samādhiṃ adhigacchatīti khantippadhānatāpi samathapakkhabhajanassa kāraṇaṃ vuttā. Uṭṭhānaṃ sampajjatīti sampannakāyikavīriyaṃ. Sammākammantavāyāmānaṃ yo kāyikādivikappo vutto pāḷiyaṃ, so nesaṃ kāyikassa payogassa samuṭṭhānavasena veditabbo.
“疾速证得”一语,是显示此为圣道修行的状态。“凭借观而证解脱”则是显示:凭借观的力量,断除的解脱如同凭借止的力量所得的镇伏解脱一样被证得。“Lokiyehīti”是一个从格的表述。“Mahantānanti”的意思是广大、殊胜,即指胜妙之义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Khippādhigamo’’ti iminā maggāsevanabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vipassanāya vimuttādhigamo’’ti iminā vipassanānubhāvena samucchedavimutti vikkhambhanavimutti viya samathānubhāvenāti dasseti. Lokiyehīti nissakkavacanaṃ. Mahantānanti uḷārānaṃ, paṇītānanti attho.
56 56. 此为简择摄。它针对的是贪等作为欺诳之因的那些恶法。“净化”是指如此净化——令关于皈依等对象的无知等染污不再生起。“圆满”是指如此圆满——令戒以无破损等状态而成为圆满、无有缺失。显示巴利原文
56.Tanti vicayahāraṃ. Visaṃvādanahetūnaṃ lobhādīnaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ. Sodhentoti yathā saraṇādivisayā aññāṇādisaṃkilesā na pavattanti, evaṃ sodhento. Paripūrentāti yathā sīlaṃ akhaṇḍādibhāvena paripuṇṇaṃ hoti anūnaṃ, evaṃ paripūrentā.
以“Tathāpaṭipajjanto”一句,显示了世尊的深重恩德已得圆满;此即于第一偈中,所说为“见地”与“修地”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tathāpaṭipajjanto’’ti iminā satthu mahāpatikārabhāvo paripuṇṇo dassitoti paṭhamavāde ‘‘dassanābhūmiñca bhāvanābhūmiñcā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“yassa atthāyā”:即为了谁的利益、为断除何种。 “tathā paṭipannassa”:即如以不净禅那等为基,从而证得不来道等者——如此行道之人。显示巴利原文
Yassa atthāyāti yassa yassa pahānatthāya. Tathā paṭipannassāti yathā asubhajjhānādiṃ pādakaṃ katvā anāgāmimaggādiadhigamo hoti, tathā paṭipannassa.
“杀了”:指被杀害。显示巴利原文
Vadhitanti ghātitaṃ.
“为人身者”——此语须联系前后文来理解:应配合“父亲为人身的漏尽者”,同样“母亲为人身”也应如此结合。随说,即对分类所宜的宣告,或以适宜分类的言辞令其了知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Manussabhūto’’ti idaṃ pubbāparāpekkhaṃ katvā ‘‘pitā manussabhūto khīṇāsavo’’ti ca tathā ‘‘mātā manussabhūtā’’ti yojetabbaṃ. Bhedānurūpassa sāvanaṃ anussāvanaṃ, bhedānurūpena vā vacanena viññāpanaṃ.
57 “人身”:指生于人类。“性根成就”:即成就男性。“因”:指具足意与语的愿求成就,以及往昔的因行。“见师”:即亲见导师。“功德成就”:即获得神通与等至。“责任”:即不顾惜自己的身体,以行利益导师之事。“欲”:即对成佛生起坚固的愿求,有不退转的性质。显示巴利原文
57.Manussattanti manussajātitā. Liṅgasampattīti purisabhāvo. Hetūti manovacīpaṇidhānasiddhiyā saddhiṃ pubbahetusampadā. Satthāradassananti satthu sammukhībhāvo. Guṇasampattīti abhiññāsamāpattilābho. Adhikāroti attano sarīranirapekkhaṃ satthu upakārakaraṇaṃ. Chandatāti buddhabhāvāya daḷhacchandatā anivattidhammatā.
然而,“不生起”是有经文依据的,如“我没有老师,没有与我相等者”等。世尊是立足于这个世界而宣说此语。后来有人问:“舍利弗尊者,如今可有其他沙门或婆罗门,能在正觉上与世尊相等吗?”舍利弗被这样问时,答道:“尊者,没有。”为了说明其中的理由,世尊开示了这部经:“这是无有是处、无有容处的,即在一个世界之中,会有两位阿拉汉、正自觉者同时出现。”法将舍利弗正是借助这部经表明,此处“不生起”仅就这一世界被确定为佛田而言,并非指其他地方。这便是他的用意。显示巴利原文
Na uppajjantīti pana atthīti ‘‘na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me na vijjatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341; kathā. 405; mahāva. 11; mi. pa. 4.5.11) imissā lokadhātuyā ṭhatvā vadantena bhagavatā ‘‘kiṃ panāvuso sāriputta, atthetarahi añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavato samasamo sambodhiyanti evaṃ puṭṭho ahaṃ, bhante, ‘no’ti vadeyya’’nti (dī. ni. 3.161) vatvā tassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.161; a. ni. 1.277) imaṃ suttaṃ dassentena dhammasenāpatināva buddhakhettabhūtaṃ imaṃ lokadhātuṃ ṭhapetvā aññattha anuppatti vuttā hotīti adhippāyo.
“划定田界”即是指作了这样的确认:“这便是佛田。”显示巴利原文
Khettapariggaho kato nāma hoti ‘‘idaṃ buddhakhettaṃ nāmā’’ti.
“如此成为是处与非处的状态”:即依前述方式而成为是处,或依所说之理,其他诸法亦各自相应,以是处与非处的方式而转起。“成为众生施设之所依”:这是就紧系于根的诸蕴而说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānabhāvaṃ gatāti vuttappakārena ṭhānabhūtā, vuttanayena vā aññepi yathārahaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānabhāvena pavattā. Sattapaññattiyā upādānabhūtāti indriyabaddhe khandhe sandhāya vadati.
58 “果的现证性”:即对“此业得此果”等各个业果的如实通达。“无不予果”:指在因缘和合时,业决定感得果报。因此他说“已造作、已积聚的”。显示巴利原文
58.Phalassapaccakkhakāritāti ‘‘imassa kammassa idaṃ phala’’nti taṃtaṃkammaphalāvabodho. Appadānābhāvoti paccayasamavāye kammassa ekantato phaluppādanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘katūpacitāna’’nti.
59 「执取的事物」:即因渴爱的执取而耽著的事物。「色有、无色有等」:犹如「有爱」那样,它自身显现。显示巴利原文
59.Ajjhositavatthunāti taṇhābhinivesavasena abhiniviṭṭhavatthunā. Rūpabhavaarūpabhavādināti bhavataṇhā viya sayaṃ dasseti.
「三蕴」:即戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴三蕴。「道的分类」:即以「能往一切处」等所分的道类。显示巴利原文
Khandhattayavasenāti sīlādikkhandhattayavasena. Paṭipadāvibhāgenāti ‘‘sabbatthagāminī’’ti ādipaṭipadāya bhedena.
「能往彼彼处者」:即在地狱乃至涅槃的两种乾闼婆处中,能往彼彼处的习性。「能往一切处者」:即如前所述,能往一切处的习性。显示巴利原文
Tatthatatthagāminīti nirayādinibbānanti dvīsu gandhabbaṭṭhānesu tattha tattheva gamanasīlā. Sabbatthagāminīti yathāvuttesu sabbaṭṭhānesu ca gamanasīlā.
等活、黑绳、众合、号叫、大号叫、炎热、大炎热、无间——这八个是大地狱。每一大地狱各有四个门,每一门各有粪塘地狱等四种,如此便描述了十六个近边地狱。显示巴利原文
Sañjīvo kāḷasuttaṃ saṅghāto roruvo mahāroruvo tāpano mahātāpano avīcīti ete aṭṭha mahānirayā. Ekekassa cattāri cattāri dvārāni, ekekasmiṃ dvāre cattāro cattāro gūthanirayādayoti evaṃ soḷasa ussadaniraye vaṇṇenti.
帝释、夜摩等为上首天王;生主、婆楼那、伊舍那等,则是地位次等的随从仆役。显示巴利原文
Sakkasuyāmādiko jeṭṭhakadevarājā. Pajāpativaruṇaīsānādayo viya dutiyādiṭṭhānantarakārako paricārako.
就“烦恼欲”而言:这是依《大经》中“意图是欲,贪是欲,意图贪是欲”所说的“意图”来说的。因为这种意图同样能逼迫、烧灼,它本身生起即具烦恼性,所以称为烦恼欲,并非因为它是烦恼的所依处。“与欲相应”:即与那称为欲贪的欲相应,或为欲所系缚。还应了知,虽然还有其他与欲相应之法,但“欲”这个名称却专门用在“寻”上,作为界名而约定俗成,这是由于寻在生起欲寻时,力量特强的缘故。在嗔恨界等中,道理也是如此。“害”:就是令他人或自己受苦。不过,这里指的是不正当的害——邪害。显示巴利原文
Kilesakāmapakkheti ‘‘saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmoti (mahāni. 1) ettha vuttasaṅkappavasena vuttaṃ. Sopi hi vibādhati, upatāpeti cāti kilesattasambhavato kilesakāmo vutto, na kilesavatthubhāvato. Kāmapaṭisaṃyuttoti kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena sampayutto, kāmapaṭibaddho vā. Aññesu ca kāmapaṭisaṃyuttesu dhammesu vijjamānesu vitakke eva kāmasaddo dhātusaddo niruḷhoti veditabbo vitakkassa kāmasaṅkappavuttiyā sātisayattā. Esa nayo byāpādadhātuādīsu. Parassa, attano ca dukkhāpanaṃ vihiṃsā. Taṃ tu micchāhi vihiṃsā.
应当依种子等界的差别,来了知蕴等法的差别。“蕴”:即两类存在所成的聚合体。显示巴利原文
Bījādidhātunānattavasena khandhādinānattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Khandhoti dvidhābhūtaggo.
60 “意乐界”:即意乐之自性。如同粪便等有其自性,只会与粪便等相合;同样,人们的意乐也有这样的自性:无道德者只会与无道德者相合。显示巴利原文
60.Ajjhāsayadhātūti ajjhāsayasabhāvo. Yathā gūthādīnaṃ sabhāvo eso yaṃ gūthādīheva saṃsandati, evaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayassevesa sabhāvo, yaṃ dussīlādayo dussīlādikeheva saṃsandanti.
由于善行以信为根本,故说“凡依于信”等语。正如经中所说:“信是种子”(《经集》77)。应如此联结而理解:凡依于贪,也依于信;凡依于嗔,也依于信;凡依于痴,也依于信。“依精进”:即依于正勤精进。“依慧”:即依于道正见。显示巴利原文
Saddhāmūlakattā kusalakiriyāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ saddhāvasenā’’tiādi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘saddhā bīja’’nti (su. ni. 77). Yaṃ lobhavasena, saddhāvasena ca dosavasena, saddhāvasena ca mohavasena , saddhāvasena cāti yojetabbaṃ. Vīriyavasenāti sammappadhānavīriyavasena. Paññāvasenāti maggasammādiṭṭhivasena.
由于不善业已造作,且在圣典中亦有明言,故说为“被异熟障所覆”。应当知这仅是举例,因为被业障等所覆也在理所之中。正如所举的提婆达多、瞿迦梨、善星、离车族之子。虽然世尊看到通达分已不可行,而不为他们开示导向证悟的法,但仍宣说属于习行分的法,因此便有了“实谛的证得”等语句。“阿阇世等”:以“等”字应知包含萨遮迦等人。世尊也是为他们未来的习行目的而说法。因为导师预见“未来教法将立足铜掌岛,此人将投生善家而出家,成为名为黑佛护的长老、具足无碍解的大漏尽者”,故为其说法,而他也确实如所预见。显示巴利原文
Akusalassa kammassa katokāsatāya pāḷiyaṃ vuttattā ‘‘vipākāvaraṇena nivuta’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ kammāvaraṇādīhipi nivutatāya icchitattā. Tathā hi yathā devadattaṃ kokālikaṃ sunakkhattaṃ licchaviputtanti udāhaṭaṃ, yadipi bhagavā paṭivedhassa aṭṭhānataṃ disvā nibbedhabhāgiyadesanaṃ na deseti, vāsanābhāgiyaṃ pana tathārūpassa deseti evāti dassento ‘‘saccappaṭivedha’’ntiādimāha. Ajātasattuādīnanti ādisaddena saccakādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tassāpi bhagavā anāgate vāsanatthāya dhammaṃ desesi. Satthā hi ‘‘anāgate tambapaṇṇidīpe sāsanaṃ patiṭṭhahissatī’’ti tatthāyaṃ kulaghare nibbatto pabbajitvā kāḷabuddharakkhitatthero nāma pabhinnapaṭisambhido mahākhīṇāsavo bhavissatīti idaṃ disvā dhammaṃ desesi, so ca tathā ahosīti.
“不圆满”:指未达到一向具足令异熟成熟的能力,故说不圆满。“业不圆满”,是就与见依止、与见相应的业而说的。因此说:“显示了夹杂烦恼障的业障。”显示巴利原文
Asampuṇṇeti ekantato vipākadānasamatthatāvasena pāripūriṃ anupagate. Diṭṭhupanissayadiṭṭhisahagatassa kammaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kamme asampuṇṇe’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kilesantarāya missakaṃ kammantarāyaṃ dassetvā’’ti.
61 于此,因意指戒禁取,故于经中以“见”为主要而被执取。正如所说:“如富楼那与牛行者、以及裸形狗行者”。正因为他们的邪见之业受持不圆满,世尊便为其说法:“富楼那,有此四种业……”等等。藉由那次开示,他们便舍离彼见,安立于正道。显示巴利原文
61. Diṭṭhi panettha padhānabhāvena pāḷiyaṃ gahitā sīlabbataparāmāsassa adhippetattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘yathā puṇṇañca govatikaṃ, acelañca kukkuravatika’’nti. Asampuṇṇattā eva hi tassa micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānassa tesaṃ bhagavā ‘‘cattārimāni, puṇṇa, kammānī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.81) dhammaṃ desesi. Tāya ca desanāya te taṃ diṭṭhiṃ paṭinissajjitvā sammatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu.
62 「熟练清净」:因熟练而清净,故名熟练清净。「出起」指:从初禅等出起后,成为证得第二禅等的缘,故说“出起即熟练清净”。「有分出起」即是有分的生起。因为有分心生起时,具足此心者即是从等至出起。想与感受的息灭,即是「远离解脱」。显示巴利原文
62. Paguṇatāya vodānaṃ paguṇavodānaṃ. Tadeva paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyajjhānādiadhigamassa paccayattā vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma hotīti āha ‘‘vuṭṭhānaṃ paguṇavodāna’’nti. Bhavaṅgavuṭṭhānaṃ bhavaṅguppatti. Bhavaṅgacitte hi uppanne taṃsamaṅgisamāpattito vuṭṭhito nāma hoti. Saññāvedayitaapagamo eva apagamavimokkho.
此「出起」:依所说善巧,因是出起之因故,称为出起。正如经中所说:“清净亦是从各个定中出起”(《分别论》828)。然而,由于该“出起”经文未被收录,故《除迷论》云:“从灭尽定出起,名为篇章外之出起”。若有人说:“从灭出起到果等至的出起,经文未提及”,则可依“对从灭出起者,非想非非想处以无间缘作为果等至的缘”(《发趣论》1.1.417)这一篇章予以驳斥。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ vuṭṭhānanti idaṃ yathāvuttaṃ kosallaṃ vuṭṭhānahetubhāvato vuṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘vodānampi tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828). Imāya pana vuṭṭhānapāḷiyā asaṅgahitattā ‘‘nirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhānaṃ pāḷimuttakavuṭṭhānaṃ nāmā’’ti sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 828) vuttaṃ. Ye pana ‘‘nirodhato phalasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhāna’’nti pāḷiyaṃ natthīti vadeyyuṃ, te ‘‘nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ phalasamāpattiyā anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417) imāya pāḷiyā paṭisedhetabbā.
63 在此,“此即彼之依止”等:应知,这是通过依止之了知等,阐明诸有情依何种根、何种胜劣差别而成善依止或恶依止等。如此,即成立了根胜劣智与依止随眠智各各不共,及根胜劣智与胜解意乐智各各为力。显示巴利原文
63.Ayaṃ cassa āsayoti ettha āsayajānanādinā yehi indriyehi yehi paroparehi sattā kalyāṇapāpāsayādikā honti, tesaṃ pajānanaṃ vibhāvetīti veditabbaṃ. Evañca katvā indriyaparopariyattaāsayānusayañāṇānaṃ visuṃ asādhāraṇatā, indriyaparopariyattanānādhimuttikatāñāṇānaṃ visuṃ balatā ca siddhā hoti.
“有力者”(thāmagato)一词:这里应知,所谓“有力趣向”(thāmagamana),是指唯属欲贪等的特有自性,不与其他人共;正如所说:“有力者断随眠”(《无碍解道》3.21)。显示巴利原文
Thāmagatoti ettha thāmagamanaṃ nāma aññesaṃ asādhāraṇo kāmarāgādīnaṃ eva āveṇiko sabhāvo veditabbo, yato ‘‘thāmagato anusayaṃ pajahatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.21) vuttaṃ.
仅仅以转向便得忆念,因为是随愿而转起。诚然有说:“佛陀世尊的智系于意愿,佛陀世尊的智系于作意……”等(《大义释》156;《小义释·摩伽罗阇青年问释》85;《无碍解道》3.5)。犹如一切知智,世尊的一切智都不需要预备作业。显示巴利原文
Āvajjanamatteneva sarati ākaṅkhāyattavuttikattā. Vuttañhi ‘‘ākaṅkhapaṭibaddhaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇaṃ, manasikārapaṭibaddhaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇa’’ntiādi (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5). Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ viya hi sabbaṃ bhagavato ñāṇaṃ parikammanirapekkhanti.
64 “从随烦恼解脱”(upakkilesavimuttattā)中:这里,心等本身就是随烦恼,或者是能生业的障盖烦恼(pāribandhakilesā)。在遍业、遍作修习、禅那成就、遍的状态、十四种调心、神通引摄等一切处,精进力都有极大的帮助,所以说“由精进修习力所产生”(vīriyabhāvanābalanibbatta)。
“似天”(dibbasadisattā)等:存在于天中的,称为“天”(dibba);就像所说的净天眼,“似天”(dibbaṃ viyāti dibbaṃ)指最高的神通智。“天住”(dibbavihāra)是四种色界禅那。由于依这四种禅那而生起和证得,所以称为“天”;以那些天为原因,所以称为“天”——这样说以显示其含义。
“依止天住”(dibbavihārasannissitattā):是由色界第四禅作为依止缘而生起的,所以由天所依止,因此称为“天”——这样说以显示其含义。文字学者们在游戏等中诵读“天”(divu)字,所以说那一切都应随顺声明家的教导。显示巴利原文
64.Upakkilesavimuttattāti ettha cittādi eva upakkilesā, nibbattakassa vā kammassa pāribandhakilesā. Kasiṇakammaparikammajhānanibbattanakasiṇabhāvo cuddasavidhena cittaparidamanaṃ abhiññābhinīhāroti sabbatthāpi vīriyabalassa bahūpakārattā vuttaṃ ‘‘vīriyabhāvanābalanibbatta’’nti. Dibbasadisattāti dibbe bhavanti dibbaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ pasādacakkhu, dibbaṃ viyāti dibbaṃ, aggataṃ abhiññāṇaṃ. Dibbavihāro cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni. Tesaṃ vasena nibbattitvā paṭiladdhabbattā dibbaṃ, tena dibbahetukattā dibbanti vuttanti dasseti. Dibbavihārasannissitattāti rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānena nissayapaccayena nibbattattā, tena dibbanissitaṃ dibbanti dasseti. Divusaddaṃ akkharacintakā kīḷādīsu paṭhantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabba’’nti. Purimā hi tayo atthā kīḷatthassa vasena, itare jutigatiatthavaseneva dassitāti.
“人界行境”(manussūpacāraṃ)即人的活动范围(manussagocara)。因为它是刹那现在,极其短暂,所以无法看见。而以“临近死”(āsannacutikā)等语,是依相续现在来说明“正在死时,正在结生时”。说“是与愚痴流注相应故”等,则显示众生低劣、优胜等的状态,都是以愚痴等业为因,成为流注果。这些是“天眼”的近因,也就是天眼的基础,因此说“与天眼一同成就”。它们实际上是天眼的资具智。显示巴利原文
Manussūpacāranti manussagocaraṃ. Daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā ittarakhaṇattā khaṇapaccuppannassa. ‘‘Āsannacutikā’’tiādinā santatipaccuppannavasena ‘‘cavamāne upapajjamāne’’ti vuttanti dasseti. ‘‘Mohanissandayuttattā’’tiādinā sattānaṃ hīnapaṇītattādibhāvassa mohādikammanidānahetukataṃ, nissandaphalatañca dasseti. Dibbacakkhussa pādakaṃ etesanti dibbacakkhupādakāni. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhantī’’ti. Tāni hissa paribhaṇḍañāṇāni.
“执取”(samādānāni):因为被执取,故称执取。那些以业为执取者,称为“业执取者”(kammasamādānā)。前一种含义是:应当被执取的种种业;后一种含义则是:能令执取业者,故称业执取者。“邪见业执取者”(micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā)指邪见的业执取者,这里是以工具格表示原因。显示巴利原文
Samādīyantīti samādānāni, kammāni samādānāni etesanti kammasamādānā. Samādātabbanānāvidhakammāti attho purime atthe, dutiye pana kammāni samādāpentīti kammasamādānā, micchādiṭṭhiyā kammasamādānā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, hetuatthe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ.
“彼语”(taṃ vācaṃ)是指诽谤圣者的语言。“彼心”(taṃ cittaṃ)是指能生起这种诽谤的心。“彼见”(taṃ diṭṭhiṃ)是指以邪执诽谤圣者的邪胜解(micchābhinivesa)。此处还有这样的含义:如同一位具足因缘的比丘,清净了戒律,成就定而安住,若念的生起稍缓,便在现法中速证通慧而获阿拉汉果,或在有余依时证不来果。同样,如果有人诽谤圣者,以前述之心、见背离正法,作出不当的言行,说“尊者,我对您说了不该说的话”而不忏悔,令圣者不悦,他身坏命终之后必定堕入地狱。在这里,对于那些对圣者具足净信心的人,向圣者忏悔并断除那些恶语等,就是“弃舍”(paṭinissagga)。没有比这更重的罪过了,因为它能带来一切不利,毁坏一切利乐和幸福。显示巴利原文
Taṃ vācanti taṃ ariyānaṃ upavadanavācaṃ. Taṃ cittanti samuṭṭhāpakacittaṃ. Taṃ diṭṭhinti yena micchāgāhena ariye anuddhaṃseti, micchābhinivesaṃ. Ayampettha attho – yathā nāma hetusampannassa bhikkhuno visuddhaṃ sīlaṃ, samādhiñca sampādetvā ṭhitassa dandho satuppādo khippābhiññāya diṭṭheva dhamme aññā, sati vā upādisese anāgāmitā. Evamevaṃ yo ariyūpavādī yathāvuttacittadiṭṭhīhi apakkamitvā appatirūpaṃ sabhāvaṃ ‘‘mayā, bhante, tumhākaṃ upari vutta’nti accayadesanāya te na khamāpeti, so kāyassa bhedā niraye evāti. Tesu pasannacittassa khamāpanañhettha tesaṃ vācādīnaṃ pahānaṃ paṭinissaggova. Ito sāvajjataraṃ nāma aññaṃ natthi sabbānatthavidhānato, sabbahitasukhaparidhaṃsanato ca.
“身坏”(kāyassabhedā)中的“身”字,在此是“有身”(attabhāva)的同义词,故说“舍离执取蕴后”。“彼之后”(tadanantaraṃ)即指那名爲死的蕴舍离之后。“para”一词,或指“再生蕴”之义,或指“不以先前的事物爲所缘”(anorimabhūtavatthuvisaya),或仅作界限的简别。依前一种含义,说“于执取再生蕴时”;依后一种含义,说“从死后向上”。显示巴利原文
Kāyassabhedāti idha kāyasaddo attabhāvapariyāyoti āha ‘‘upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā’’ti. Tadanantaranti tassa maraṇasaṅkhātassa khandhapariccāgassa anantaraṃ. Abhinibbattakkhandhattho parasaddo, anorimabhūtavatthuvisayo vā siyā, avadhivisesanamattaṃ vā. Tesu purimaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe’’ti, pacchimassa pana vasena ‘‘cutito uddha’’nti.
“以相反的方式说”(vuttavipariyāyena),是指“善行”“妙行”等表述。“杀戮”(hananaṃ)即是杀害(ghātanaṃ)。显示巴利原文
Vuttavipariyāyenāti ‘‘suṭṭhu caritaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā carita’’ntiādinā. Hanananti ghātanaṃ.
“因与非因”即“处与非处”。把握与思相应或不相应的法,视爲通向地狱等处以及涅槃的道——亦即业,由此而说“唯是业的判别”。“业果差别”是指业果的差异、业果的分别。它不能决意,如同第八、第九力那样;也不能变化,如同类似的神变智那样;以此显示它并不具备与那些力相似的能力。或者,不能像禅那等智那样决意与变化。这里虽将禅那等的省察智称爲第六力,并说它有寻有伺,但由于离开禅那等便没有省察,故将伴随禅那等的智也包含在内而这样说。又或者,爲显示一切知智不能像禅那等那样完成一切力的作用,因此《分别论根本复注》说:“不能成爲禅那而决意,不能成爲神通而变化。”然而,不应认爲任何力本身就是禅那或神通。显示巴利原文
Kāraṇākāraṇanti ṭhānāṭṭhānaṃ. Cetanācetanāsampayuttadhamme nirayādinibbānagāmipaṭipadābhūte kammanti gahetvā āha ‘‘kammaparicchedamevā’’ti. Kammavipākantaraṃ kammavipākaviseso kammavipākassa vibhāgo. Appetuṃ na sakkoti aṭṭhamanavamabalāni viya, taṃsadisaṃ iddhividhañāṇaṃ viya vikubbituṃ, etenassa balasadisatañca nivāreti. Jhānādiñāṇaṃ viya vā appetuṃ , vikubbituñca. Yadipi hi jhānādipaccavekkhaṇāñāṇaṃ idha chaṭṭhaṃ balanti tassa savitakkasavicāratā vuttā, tathāpi jhānādīhi vinā paccavekkhaṇā natthīti jhānādisahagataṃ ñāṇaṃ tadantogadhaṃ katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Atha vā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ jhānādikiccaṃ viya na sabbaṃ balakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ, iddhi hutvā vikubbituñca na sakkotī’’ti (vibha. mūlaṭī. 831) vuttaṃ, na pana kassaci balassa jhānaiddhibhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
3. 理相应理趣之释显示巴利原文
3. Yuttihārasampātavaṇṇanā
65 当被对治法强力压制时,善法便全然无法生起;即便生起,也不能正确地发挥作用,因此便等同于「未生起」。为了说明只要遮止对治法,善法便能发挥其作用,故说「以意为第六……将成为」。「住者」:是指安住的因由。此处的「住者」也是同一道理,由此显示:由于防护了心,便如前面所说的那样,绝对会朝向正思惟的所缘。所谓「如前面所说的那样」,是指不给邪思惟任何机会,令出离寻等得到清净。「毫无颠倒地执取」是指:从身体等不净的角度来执取。「堕落的怖畏」:即是对恶趣的怖畏。以上所有这些义理,诸如「以正思惟所缘者将成为正见」等说法,皆与理相应,因为并无不成立的因由。显示巴利原文
65. Paṭipakkhapaṭibāḷhā kusalā dhammā uppajjitumeva na sakkonti, uppannāpi sammadeva attano kiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthatāya anuppannasadisāti paṭipakkhanivāraṇena kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ kiccakaraṇabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘manacchaṭṭhāni…pe… bhavissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Viharantassāti viharaṇahetu. Viharantoti etthāpi eseva nayo, tena rakkhitacittatā vuttanayena ekantato sammāsaṅkappagocaratāya ca saṃvattatīti dasseti. Vuttanayenāti micchāsaṅkappānaṃ avasaraṃ adatvā visodhitanekkhammādivitakkatāya. Aviparītamevāti kāyādiasubhādito ādānaṃ. Vinipātabhayanti duggatibhayaṃ. Sabbopi cāyamatthoti ‘‘sammāsaṅkappagocaro sammādiṭṭhi bhavissatī’’tiādīsu attho yuttiyā yutto eva anarūpakāraṇabhāvato.
4. 近依处理趣等之释显示巴利原文
4. Padaṭṭhānahārasampātādivaṇṇanā
66 又或者,由于防护心远离染污,便能令三种善行得以圆满,因此说「防护心者」——于此,这种心被防护的状态,即是身善行等三种善行的「近依处」。应当如此理解此处的含义。「依靠自己的」是指:依靠自己的努力。显示巴利原文
66. Yasmā vā saṃkilesato rakkhitacittassa tīṇi sucaritāni pāripūriṃ gacchanti, tasmā rakkhitacittassāti ettha yāyaṃ rakkhitacittatā, sā kāyasucaritādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ padaṭṭhānanti evamettha attho veditabbo. Attādhīnanti attaparādhīnaṃ.
「由此」即是:由于把握了因,果也就一同被把握。显示巴利原文
Tato evāti kāraṇaggahaṇena phalassa gahitattā eva.
68 此处“iti”一词,意为“被保护”。显示巴利原文
68.Tatthaitisaddoti ‘‘paripālīyatī’’ti itisaddo.
73-4 在巴利语中,“五根为三蕴所摄”。此处,由信根、精进根、念根摄取了应被清净的巴帝摩卡等三种戒;由这些根,戒蕴即被摄。以定根与慧根摄取定蕴与慧蕴,这是很明显的道理;其余的部分也是如此,所以才会说“其余……都如前所述的方式”。显示巴利原文
73-4. Pāḷiyaṃ pañcindriyāni tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitānīti ettha saddhāvīriyasatindriyehi pātimokkhādi tividhaṃ sīlaṃ gahitaṃ sodhetabbattā. Tesanti tehi sīlakkhandho saṅgahito. Samādhipaññindriyehi samādhipaññākkhandhā gahitāti pākaṭoyamattho, tathā sesampīti āha ‘‘ito paresu…pe… vuttanayamevā’’ti.
76 所谓“因、从因生起、缘、从缘生起”,此处关于因与缘的分别,前文已经说过。显示巴利原文
76.Hetuhetusamuppannapaccayapaccayuppannasaṅkhātassāti ettha hetupaccayavibhāgo heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
杂理趣之释显示巴利原文
Missakahārasampātavaṇṇanā
此处,由于在诸经中显示诸理趣的结合方式时,并非如同《理趣分别》的开示那样只显示理趣本身的相状,因此为了依循《指导论》中所传的理趣,以另一种方式显示理趣结合的方法,便说「再者」等。在此,为显了:明与无明——即善心与不善心的转起——其中无贪与贪、无瞋与瞋,也是以辗转相续的方式转起而成为起因,故说「六法……是根」。而且,正如以起因的方式成为前导,透过其自己掌控的特性,也能获得前导性,故说「于有增上者,为增上;于一切心生起者,为根」。「无贪的」即与无贪相应之心生起。「以出离欲」是指以善欲而言。「出离」一词常用于出家等处。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Idāni yasmā suttesu hārānaṃ yojanānayadassanattā hārasampātadesanā hāravibhaṅgadesanā viya na hārasarūpamattadassanattā, tasmā peṭakopadese āgatanayānusārena aparehi vipariyāyehi hārasampātayojanāvidhiṃ dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha vijjāvijjāya kusalākusalacittappavattiyā alobhādosalobhadosāpi paramparabhāvena pavattanti nidānabhāvatoti dassento ‘‘cha dhammā…pe… mūlānī’’ti āha. Yathā ca nidānabhāvena pubbaṅgamatā, evaṃ attano vasevattanenāpi pubbaṅgamatā labbhatevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sādhipatikānaṃ adhipati, sabbacittuppādānaṃ indriyānī’’ti. Alobhassāti alobhayuttassa cittuppādassa. Nekkhammacchandenāti kusalacchandena. Nekkhammasaddo pabbajjādīsu niruḷho. Vuttañhi –
‘‘Pabbajjā paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ, nibbānañca vipassanā; Sabbepi kusalā dhammā, ‘nekkhamma’nti pavuccare’’ti. (itivu. aṭṭha. 109; dī. ni. ṭī. 2.359; a. ni. ṭī. 2.2.66) –
在这些之中,此处是指善法,故说「以善欲」。这是以出离欲为亲依止缘,而非以增上缘。意思是:若有一以无贪为主的心生起,意便以作为亲依止缘的此出离欲为其前导。其余二句,理亦同此。显示巴利原文
Tesu idha kusalā dhammā adhippetā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kusalacchandenā’’ti. Nekkhammacchandena upanissayabhūtena, na adhipatibhūtena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – alobhappadhāno ce cittuppādo hoti, nekkhammacchandena upanissayabhūtena mano tassa pubbaṅgamo hoti. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
从诸法以意为前导时起,意即成为他们之最上、最殊胜者,故说「意为胜」,即意于他们法中最为殊胜……等。「意所成性」是指由意所造等状态;而此状态即是意以俱生等缘成为他们之缘的状态,故说「意所成……即是缘」。「而他们」:此中「而」字是显明特别意义的,意谓虽对他们法,欲等亦是缘,但因是区别于根等缘的特别之缘,故特别依于意而说「意所成」。其中,「由欲所发起而引导者」:以先前所说的出离等欲正确地向上引导而生起。正因如此,由于是从出离寻等生起的,故为无浊思惟所生起。由于与彼相应的意识界触共同安立,故为触所集起。如所说:「诸比丘,触已而受,触已而想,触已而思。」「此是意业」:不造作身表和语表的动作,由具足信且净信的心所转起,此即善意业。而彼有三种:与无贪俱行、与无瞋俱行、与正见俱行。显示巴利原文
Yadaggena tesaṃ dhammānaṃ mano pubbaṅgamaṃ, tadaggena tesaṃ jeṭṭhaṃ, padhānañcāti vuttaṃ ‘‘manoseṭṭhāti mano tesaṃ dhammāna’’ntiādi. Manomayatā manena katādibhāvo, so ca manassa tesaṃ sahajātādinā paccayabhāvo evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘manomayāti…pe… paccayo’’ti. Te panāti ettha pana-saddo visesatthadīpako, tenetaṃ dasseti – yadipi tesaṃ dhammānaṃ chandādayopi paccayā eva, indriyādipaccayena pana savisesaṃ paccayabhūtassa manasseva vaseneva vuttaṃ ‘‘manomayā’’ti. Tattha chandasamudānītāti yathāvuttanekkhammādichandena sammā uddhamuddhaṃ nītā, tato samudāgatāti attho. Tato eva nekkhammavitakkādito samuppannattā anāvilasaṅkappasamuṭṭhānā. Tajjāmanoviññāṇadhātusamphassena sahādhiṭṭhānato phassasamodhānā. ‘‘Phuṭṭho, bhikkhave, vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) hi vuttaṃ. Idaṃ manokammanti kāyaṅgavācaṅgacopanaṃ akatvā saddhāsamannāgatena pasannena manasā pavattaṃ idaṃ kusalaṃ manokammaṃ. Taṃ pana anabhijjhāsahagataṃ, abyāpādasahagataṃ, sammādiṭṭhisahagatanti tividhaṃ hoti.
「说」:指以不妄语等方式,依语表的运作而转起的语表,成就应成就之事。因此,从身门转起的善语业亦被包含在内。正如后文将说:「因语表的扩展,亦因这样地认可,故称为说」。一切语业,依真实等分为四种。「作」:指由对自他有益或有害等种种原因,依身表的运作而转起的身表,成就应成就之事。因此,从语门转起的善身业亦被包含在内。同样,后文亦将说:「因身表的扩展,亦因这样地认可,故称为作」。若从业道来把握,依杀生等,此业可分为三种。故说「如此示现十善业道」。依十福业事,此偈颂的意义亦得成立。正如后文将说:「他具有净信心」等。说、作,或纯粹以意转起,句中的「或」字表示不确定义。正是据此而作解释的。显示巴利原文
Bhāsatīti avisaṃvādanādinā vācaṅgacopanāvasena pavattentiyā vacīviññattiyā sādhetabbaṃ sādhetīti attho, tena kāyadvārato pavattakusalavacīkammampi saṅgahitaṃ hoti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘vacīviññattivipphārato, tathā sādiyanato ca bhāsatī’’ti. Sabbampi vacīkammaṃ saccādivasena catubbidhaṃ. Karotīti attano, paresañca hitāhitāni kāraṇākāraṇehi kāyaṅgacopanāvasena pavattentiyā kāyaviññattiyā sādhetabbaṃ sādhetīti attho, tena vacīdvārato pavattakusalakāyakammampi saṅgahitaṃ hoti. Tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘kāyaviññattivipphārato, tathā sādiyanato ca karotī’’ti (netti. aṭṭha. 76 missakahārasampātavaṇṇanā). Kammapathavasena gayhamāne pāṇātipātādivasena taṃ tividhaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘iti dasakusalakammapathādassitā’’ti. Dasapuññakiriyavatthuvasenāpi gāthāya attho yujjati. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘so pasannacitto’’tiādi. Bhāsati vā karoti vā kevalaṃ manasā pavattatīti aniyamattho vā-saddo. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ.
这里的“十种善业”(dasavidhassa kusalakammassa)是指十善业道之业,或是按后文将说明的道理,指名为十福业事的善业。问:在那里,不是只说了布施等所成的三种福业事吗?确实如此,但那是因为其余的福业事都包含在这三种当中的缘故。显示巴利原文
Dasavidhassa kusalakammassāti dasavidhassa kusalakammapathakammassa, vakkhamānanayena vā dasapuññakiriyavatthusaṅkhātassa kusalakammassa. Nanu tattha dānādimayaṃ tividhameva puññakiriyavatthu vuttanti? Saccaṃ, taṃ pana itaresaṃ tadantogadhattā.
“乐追随”(sukhamanveti)是简略的说法,为了详细说明乐如何追随,所以说了“此处有人”等等。其中,“如此存在”是说这的确如此,意思是指尚未断除随眠、由能生起乐受的触所产生。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sukhamanvetī’’ti saṅkhepena vuttaṃ sukhānugamaṃ vitthārena dassento ‘‘idhassu puriso’’tiādimāha. Tattha evaṃ santanti evaṃ bhūtaṃ, appahīnānusayo hutvā sukhavedanīyaphassasambhūtanti attho.
其中,依「那,意……」等偈颂的意义来抉择四圣谛。因为在最初确定的蕴等诸法中,是以蕴为首来宣说诸谛的;又由于众生的意乐各有差别,为了让众生在种种观行方法上获得善巧,也为了显示前后的关联,所以才这样说:「如此……当抉择」。在以谛为首抉择了乐味等之后,为了结合宣说的教示论摄句,所以说「其中,以集……」等,它的意义就如前面所讲的那样。这里还有一些根据意义没有详细解释的内容,应当知道是因为在前文已经讲过的道理,以及它的意义本来就很显然的缘故。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘yaṃ mano’’tiādinā gāthātthavasena catusaccaṃ niddhāreti. Ādito vavatthāpitesu khandhādīsu khandhamukhena saccānaṃ kathitattā sattānaṃ bhinnarucibhāvato nānānayehi vipassanābhūmikosallatthaṃ, pubbāparasambandhadassanatthañca evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ…pe… niddhāretabbānī’’ti. Saccamukhena assādādike niddhāretvā desanāhārasampātaṃ yojetuṃ ‘‘tattha samudayenā’’tiādimāha, taṃ vuttanayameva. Yañhettha aññampi atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā, uttānatthattā cāti veditabbaṃ.
“由于思量相”:指以思量相为因;或读作“由于思量相”。因为没有热望,因为没有作用。由于具足那净信,意被称为“净信”;把那净信的作用归于意之后,说道:“由于不浑浊、由于对所缘的信解,意是清净的”。同样,“由于认可”——不必等到说出话语,仅由触便认可、接纳。第二个“同样,由于认可”——指身体所应作的事,如同已经作了那样,依言语的安排而成就。同样,“由于致力”——即乐如何追随,便如何积集的意思。由这些原因,即由净信心、说、作等种种原因而成就。在“不依他”这一意义中,“从此”就是从这些原因。具足净信心的人,由他的说与作,乐恰恰因此便追随他。由乐受状态,即乐受的性质。由可意状态,即可爱的性质。由于业有能引生异熟果实的给果能力,而非异熟果已经产生,所以说“作了……追随”。依于所作的原因,业即是果报的因。“不相续”:在某一相续中生起的业,不会转移到其他相续去。显示巴利原文
Mananalakkhaṇeti mananalakkhaṇahetu. ‘‘Mananalakkhaṇenā’’ti vā pāṭho. Īhābhāvato byāpārābhāvato. Yena pasādena samannāgatattā mano ‘‘pasanno’’ti vutto, tassa pasādassa kiccaṃ mane āropetvā āha ‘‘akālusiyato, ārammaṇassa okappanato ca pasannenā’’ti. Tathā sādiyanatoti vācāya vattabbaṃ avatvāva phassasādiyanato anujānato. Dutiye tathā sādiyanatoti kāyena kātabbaṃ yathā kataṃ hoti, tathā vācāya saṃvidhānato. Tathā pasutattāti yathā sukhamanveti, tathā upacitattā evāti attho. Tatoti tato kāraṇā, manasā pasannena, bhāsanena, karaṇena ca hetunāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anaññatthāti etasmiṃ pana atthe. Tatoti tato eva. Yo hi pasannamano tena yaṃ bhāsanaṃ, karaṇañca, tato eva naṃ sukhamanvetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sātabhāvatoti sātavedanābhāvato. Iṭṭhabhāvatoti manāpabhāvato. Kammato vipākuppattiphaladānasamatthabhāvena kammassa nibbattattā vipākasseva anibbattattāti āha ‘‘katū…pe… anvetīti vutta’’nti kāraṇāyatta vuttitoti katabhāvahetukattā kammassāti adhippāyo. Asaṅkantitoti yasmiṃ santāne kammaṃ nibbattaṃ, tadaññasantānā saṅkamanato.
“增上相应”:指以俱生增上之力,具足增上缘。因为这里意指:俱生诸法由于与之相应的意之力而成为前导。所以,“由此”即由于具足增上缘。“意的”是宾格用法,与“那些法”相关联。净信的善性得以成立,是因为净信以如理作意为因。问:难道在分别说答复中不是说过“那些声闻的信生起”吗?这并非信,应知那只是以与信相似的相状而将不善法如此说而已。正如将要说到的:“这不是净信”等(《导论注》76混杂论摄句释)。“乐追随”得以成立,是因为业具有给果的能力。也就是说,如同所作的业具有给果的能力,这样所作的业便被称为“已积集”。显示巴利原文
Ādhipaccayogatoti sahajātādhipativasena ādhipaccayuttattā. Sahajātadhammānañhi taṃsampayuttassa manassa vasena pubbaṅgamatā idhādhippetā. Tato evāti ādhipaccayogato eva. Manassāti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Tesaṃ dhammānanti sambandho. Kusalabhāvo yujjati pasādassa yonisomanasikārahetukattā . Nanu vibhajjabyākaraṇesu tesaṃ sāvakānaṃ saddhā uppajjatīti? Nāyaṃ saddhā, tadākārā pana akusalā dhammā tathā vuccantīti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘nāyaṃ pasādo’’tiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 76 missakahārasampātavaṇṇanā). Sukhaṃ anvetīti yujjati kammassa phaladāne samatthabhāvato. Yathā hi kataṃ kammaṃ phaladānasamatthaṃ hoti, tathā kataṃ upacitanti vuccatīti.
这里的“意之徧行”,应理解为依于出离的喜徧行和舍徧行,因为此地以善为主题。而这些徧行唯依于心而转起,不依于他,因此说:“意为意徧行之近因”。在“善聚的近因”中,首先,善触以俱生缘等方式,成为善的受蕴、想蕴、行蕴的缘。正如所说:“比丘们!触之后,感受;触之后,想;触之后,思。”(《相应部》4.93)对于受等,也应同样了知。至于信等成为缘的情况,更不待言。“一切”指四地。欲界的善法,随其所应,成为四地善法的缘;其他地的善法也是如此。显示巴利原文
Manopavicārā idha nekkhammasitā somanassūpavicārā, upekkhūpavicārā ca veditabbā kusalādhikārattā. Te pana yasmā cittaṃ nissāyeva pavattanti, nānissāya, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘mano manopavicārānaṃ padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Kusalapakkhassa padaṭṭhānanti ettha kusalo tāva phasso kusalassa vedanākkhandhassa saññākkhandhassa saṅkhārakkhandhassa sahajātādinā paccayo hoti. ‘‘Phuṭṭho, bhikkhave, vedeti, phuṭṭho sañjānāti, phuṭṭho cetetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vedanādīnampi veditabbaṃ. Saddhādīnampi paccayabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Sabbassāti catubhūmakassa. Kāmāvacarā hi kusalā dhammā yathārahaṃ catubhūmakassāpi kusalassa paccayā honti, evaṃ itarabhūmakāpi.
既然说到「以净信心说」,此处特指以正语为缘而说,因此说:「说」即正语。这里的意思是:「说」这个词由此包含了正语。同理,「作」即正业,道理相同。安住于极清净的身业、语业者,其活命清净方能成立,而非其他人,所以这样说:「它们是正命的近因」。这里的「它们」指正语与正业。再者,由于依止活命第八戒(活命净戒)的人,未生的不善法得以断除,已生的不善法不再生起;未生的善法能够生起,已生的善法得以圆满;同样,安住于正精进的人,能摧毁依于身体等生起的净想等,正念也就能够生起,因此说:「正命……乃至……近因」。增上戒即巴帝摩卡律仪,它是依于信心而成就的,所以说:「那是戒的近因」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pasannena manasā bhāsatī’’ti vuttattā visesato sammāvācāpaccayaṃ bhāsanaṃ idhādhippetanti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhāsatīti sammāvācā’’ti. Tatthāyamadhippāyo ‘‘bhāsatīti yamidaṃ padaṃ, iminā sammāvācā gahitā hotī’’ti. Karotīti sammākammantoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Suparisuddhe kāyavacīkamme ṭhitassa ājīvapārisuddhi, na itarassāti vuttaṃ ‘‘te sammāājīvassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Tattha teti sammāvācākammantā. Yasmā pana ājīvaṭṭhamake sīle patiṭṭhitassa uppannānuppannānaṃ akusaladhammānaṃ pahānānuppādanāni, anuppannuppannānaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ uppādanapāripūriyā ca sambhavanti, tathā sammāvāyāme ṭhitasseva kāyādīsu subhasaññādividdhaṃsinī sammāsati sambhavati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sammāājīvo…pe…padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Jeṭṭhakasīlaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvaro, saddhāsādhano ca soti āha ‘‘taṃ sīlassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti.
「它们」指身业和语业。说它们是「业的缘」,意思是它们以善业为因。显示巴利原文
Tesanti kāyavacīkammānaṃ. Kammapaccayatāyāti kusalakammahetukatāya.
其词义也如前面所说:「能思量故,名为意;能了别所缘故,名为识」等。显示巴利原文
Padattho ca vuttanayenāti ‘‘mananato ārammaṇavijānanato’’tiādinā.
所谓「这是回转」,是指依同类法与异类法而作的回转。其中,对善根、正勤、道等的拣择,是同类法的回转;对无明、有、渴爱的拣择,则是异类法的回转。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃāvaṭṭoti ayaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena āvaṭṭo. Ettha hi kusalamūlasammattamaggādiniddhāraṇā sabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanā. Avijjābhavataṇhānaṃ niddhāraṇā visabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanā.
在分别论中,已依安立之处与地的差别说明了相关理趣,易于了知。为显示法的分别,故说「此非」等语。在此先指出「不应按字面义理解」,表明此经是不了义经,随后以「凡是……」等文加以解释。为何说「唯随苦」呢?难道在任何情况下,心怀慈悯者都只行善法吗?这里并非针对这些情况而说,而是针对那些错误的决意而言——那些人将非法宣说为法,又将法宣说为非法,散布这些作为世间一切无义种子之根本、排斥一切利益安乐之方便的外道师,对他们不真实的功德心生推崇。在世间,若有人依止恶见去阻挠一个哪怕想做少许功德的人,这样的人尚且该遭呵责,何况依圣律去阻挠正行道之人呢?在这里,对他们的推崇、赞美与亲近,唯有苦果相随。正如经中所说:「愚人!我并非吝惜阿拉汉果,但这实是汝自身的恶见……乃至……将于长夜中带来不利与痛苦。」(长部·波梨品)又云:「若称赞当呵责者」(经集等),「一切无义的根本,即是亲近愚人。」显示巴利原文
Vibhattihāre padaṭṭhānabhūmivibhāgā vuttanayā, suviññeyyā cāti dhammavibhāgameva dassento ‘‘nayida’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘nayidaṃ yathārutavasena gahetabba’’nti suttassa neyyatthataṃ vatvā ‘‘yohī’’tiādinā taṃ vivarati. ‘‘Dukkhameva anvetī’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu yattha katthaci hitesitā kusalamevāti? Nayidamīdisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, adhammaṃ pana dhammoti, dhammañca pana adhammoti dīpanena lokassa sabbānatthabījabhūtesu sakalahitasukhupāyapaṭikkhepakesu titthakaresu asantaguṇasambhāvanavasena pavattamicchādhimokkhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yo hi loke appamattakampi puññaṃ kātukāmaṃ pāpikaṃ diṭṭhiṃ nissāya paṭibāhati, sopi gārayho, kimaṅgaṃ pana ariyavinaye sammāpaṭipattiṃ paṭibāhantesūti dukkhaphalāva tattha sambhāvanāpasaṃsā payirupāsanā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘na kho ahaṃ, moghapurisa, arahattassa maccharāyāmi, apica tuyhevetaṃ pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ…pe… dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.7), ‘‘yo nindiyaṃ pasaṃsati (su. ni. 663; saṃ. ni. 1.180, 181; a. ni. 4.3; netti. 92), sabbassāpi anatthassa mūlaṃ bālūpasevanā’’ti ca.
这里所说的「经」,是就《法句》中的第一首偈颂而言,即「诸法意先导……乃至……」(《法句》1,2)。「它的」是指正在作注释的这部经。显示巴利原文
Idañhi suttanti ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā…pe…pada’’nti (dha. pa. 1, 2) paṭhamaṃ gāthaṃ sandhāya vadati. Etassāti saṃvaṇṇiyamānasuttassa.
「作用施设」是指对称为增上缘的作用所作的说明。「精勤施设」是对精勤性的说明。「俱生施设」是对那些法与意一同生起的样貌所作的说明。显示巴利原文
Kiccapaññattīti adhipatipaccayasaṅkhātassa kiccassa paññāpanaṃ. Padhānapaññattīti padhānabhāvassa paññāpanā. Sahajātapaññattīti tesaṃ dhammānaṃ manasā sahabhāvapaññāpanā.
「大种等」中的「等」字,是表示起始之义,由此便将一切不能离开大种而单独存在的色法都统摄在内。显示巴利原文
Mahābhūtātīti itisaddo ādiattho, tena mahābhūtāvinābhāvī sabbo rūpadhammo saṅgayhati.
在「意先导」这一复合词中,「意」字只是该复合词的一个组成部分,因此并非纯粹的字面清净。正因如此,才说「若单取字面,则‘意先导’只是字面的清净」。「如影不离形」仅仅是说明乐随逐的一个比喻,并不能圆满表达此处所欲诠显的义理。而「那快乐便跟随他」则能圆满表达所欲诠显的义理,因此说它「既满足了字面的清净,也满足了起始的清净」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā’’ti samāsapade ‘‘mano’’ti padaṃ tadavayavamattanti āha ‘‘neva padasuddhī’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘manopubbaṅgamāti padasuddhī’’ti. ‘‘Chāyāva anapāyinī’’ti idaṃ sukhānugamassa udāharaṇamattaṃ, na yathādhippetatthaparisamāpanaṃ. ‘‘Sukhamanvetī’’ti pana yathādhippetatthaparisamāpananti vuttaṃ ‘‘padasuddhi ceva ārambhasuddhi cā’’ti.
「单一性」是就“意先导”等共性而说的,其余诸句也是如此。「差异性」是指,在由“意先导”等共性所说的法上,令信从执持中退出,而安住于名为“已净信”的特殊状态。其余诸句也是同样的道理。信本身有润泽的性质,能排除如无信那样粗涩的过失,所以说“由镇伏嗔恨”。“于外”指可作为信仰对象的事物。“随信解”是指不深入、不投入所缘,纯粹地信解。显示巴利原文
Ekattatāti manopubbaṅgamādisāmaññaṃ sandhāya vadati. Evaṃ sesesupi. Vemattatā ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā’’tiādinā sāmaññato vuttadhamme pasādo dhāraṇāya nivattetvā pasannasaṅkhāte visese avaṭṭhāpanato. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Pasādo sinehasabhāvo, assaddhiyaṃ viya lūkhasabhāvaṃ dosaṃ vinodetīti āha ‘‘byāpādavikkhambhanato’’ti. Bahiddhāti saddheyyavatthuṃ sandhāyāha. Okappanatoti ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā anupakkhanditvā saddahanato.
「可施物等」:此处的“等”字包含了悚惧、愧、遍业处、圆相等。「可爱所缘等」:此处的“等”字应当理解为包含了可爱所缘、中等所缘、门法、作意等。同样地,正如受等以可爱所缘等为缘,触也是如此,此处以“如是”一词来连接这种共通的缘性。「受等」是指受等三个蕴;而对于识,受等则是针对名色而说的。显示巴利原文
Deyyadhammādayoti ettha ādisaddena saṃvegahirottappakasiṇamaṇḍalādayo saṅgayhanti. Iṭṭhārammaṇādayoti ādisaddena iṭṭhamajjhattārammaṇā, dvāradhammā, manasikāroti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā phassoti yathā vedanādīnaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇādayo paccayo, evaṃ phassopīti paccayatāsāmaññameva upasaṃharati tathā-saddo. Vedanādīnanti hi vedanādayo tayo khandhā gahitā. Viññāṇassa vedanādayoti nāmarūpaṃ sandhāya vadati.
说“戒所成之无恚是其近因”,是因为安忍为戒的精勤所在。「他依止」是指实践、令其生起。他这样修习善心。「于未生」等,是为了显示由修习而断除的安立,依抉择分抉择偈颂之义而安立。若能这样理解,也可以依随顺分,在近因的解说中被引用。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sīlamayassa adoso padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ khantipadhānattā sīlassa. Adhiṭṭhātīti anuyuñjati uppādeti. Soti evaṃ kusalacittaṃ bhāvento. ‘‘Anuppannāna’’ntiādinā bhāvanāpahānasamāropanāni dassento nibbedhabhāgiyavasena gāthāya atthaṃ vicinitvā samāropeti, evampi sakkā yojetunti vāsanābhāgiyavasena padaṭṭhānaniddese udāharīyati.
如此,依“诸法意先导”偈颂说明了“理趣分句摄接”的解说方式后,现在再依另一偈颂来显示,故说“如是施者之福……”等。其中,“修所成”即由智慧修习所成就。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti gāthāya vasena hārasampātayojanāvidhiṃ dassetvā idāni gāthāntarena dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā dadato puñña’’ntiādimāha. Tattha bhāvanāmayanti paññābhāvanāmayaṃ.
“无贪是善根”等,是由于布施等以无贪等为主导而说;于一切处,皆应引入“所说”一词加以连接。“它们”指贪等。“出离”则特指般涅槃而说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Alobho kusalamūla’’ntiādi dānādīnaṃ alobhādipadhānattā vuttaṃ, sabbattha ca ‘‘vutta’’nti padaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Tesanti rāgādīnaṃ. Nissaraṇanti ca parinibbānameva sandhāya vadati.
“具足舍离之戒、无贪之意乐、见诸欲过患者,方能圆满其戒。”因此说“施者……为近因”。此处,粗烦恼指违犯位的烦恼,其断除应知为彼分断;中烦恼指缠缚位的烦恼;细烦恼指随眠位的烦恼。“所作地”即漏尽者之境地。显示巴利原文
Pariccāgasīlo alobhajjhāsayo kāmesu ādīnavadassāvī sammadeva sīlaṃ paripūretīti āha ‘‘dadato…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Idha oḷārikā nāma kilesā vītikkamāvatthānaṃ, tappahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānena veditabbaṃ. Majjhimānanti pariyuṭṭhānāvatthānaṃ. Sukhumānanti anusayāvatthānaṃ. Katāvībhūmi nti khīṇāsavabhūmiṃ.
“布施者”:以与道相应的无贪,向含天神的世间给予无畏布施之人。“福”指出世间的善。“自制者”:以道所摄的正语、正业、正命,从“见一处”等染污中,由道的自制而自制之人。“怨”指杀生等的恶。“善巧者”:于道正见善巧、明智之人。“舍离恶”:依各条道,对各自应断的恶法,逐步舍离,彻底断除。因此,道已被宣说。显示巴利原文
Dadatoti maggasahagatena alobhena sadevakassa lokassa abhayadānaṃ dadato. Puññanti lokuttarakusalaṃ. Saṃyamatoti maggapariyāpannehi sammāvācākammantājīvehi diṭṭhekaṭṭhādisaṃkilesato maggasaṃyamena saṃyamantassa. Veranti pāṇātipātādipāpaṃ. Kusaloti maggasammādiṭṭhiyā kusalo vicakkhaṇo. Jahāti pāpakanti tehi tehi maggehi taṃ taṃ pahātabbaṃ pāpadhammaṃ odhiso jahāti samucchindati. Tenāha ‘‘maggo vutto’’ti.
先前以“布施者”等语,未加分别地举出善根;现在为作区分,而举出“世间善根”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dadato’’tiādinā pubbe avibhāgena kusalamūlāni uddhaṭānīti idāni vibhāgena tāni uddharanto ‘‘lokiyakusalamūla’’ntiādimāha.
显示凡夫地与有学地,是为说明烦恼的断除还未彻底;显示无学地,则为说明无余依般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Puthujjanabhūmi sekkhabhūmi dassitā pahānassa vippakatabhāvadīpanato. Asekkhabhūmi dassitā anupādāparinibbānadīpanato.
“通往天界之道”,即前行道,也就是加行道。显示巴利原文
Saggagāminī paṭipadā pubbabhāgappaṭipatti.
讲说福德时,福德的果报也已同时被宣说,因此经中说:“布施者……说开示。”为了说明若不依于谛的业处,则无法断除染污,故而说:“善巧者……说开示。”显示巴利原文
Puññe kathite puññaphalampi kathitameva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘dadato…pe… desanamāhā’’ti. Saccakammaṭṭhānena vinā saṃkilesappahānaṃ natthīti dassento āha ‘‘kusalo…pe… desanamāhā’’ti.
“怨”字也用来指称不与取等恶法,故注释中说:“同样地,一切学处都应详细解说。”这里所说的两种解脱,即是有学解脱与无学解脱,亦是有余涅槃界解脱与无余依涅槃界解脱。正如随后将说的:“寂灭者,即二种涅槃界”等。显示巴利原文
Verasaddo adinnādānādipāpadhammesupi niruḷhoti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ sabbānipi sikkhāpadāni vitthāretabbānī’’ti. Dvepi vimuttiyo sekkhāsekkhavimuttiyo, saupādisesaanupādisesavimuttiyo ca. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘nibbutoti dve nibbānadhātuyo’’tiādi (netti. aṭṭha. 76).
此处是以因代果的表述,或者说由把握因而把握果,故说“两种善趣”等。轮回与还灭的成就,是此番开示的果;布施、持戒、禅修,则是证得此果的方便。“希求这两种成就者,于布施等中不应有些许放逸”——这便是世尊在此处的教令。正为指明这层含义,方说“果等应如理了知”。显示巴利原文
Kāraṇūpacārena, kāraṇaggahaṇena vā phalaṃ gahitanti āha ‘‘dve sugatiyo’’tiādi. Vaṭṭavivaṭṭasampattiyo imissā desanāya phalaṃ, tassa dānaṃ sīlaṃ bhāvanā upāyo, ‘‘sampattidvayaṃ icchantena dānādīsu appamattena bhavitabba’’nti ayamettha bhagavato āṇattīti imamatthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘phalādīni yathārahaṃ veditabbānī’’ti.
“简择”即指简择理的契入,此处说的就是这个意思。此后的内容,解说方式亦同。“三种施所成”等语句,显示了句义上的简择;藉此,味等以及其余简择理所摄的句义,都已从意义上被清晰辨析过。至于“舍离了色等所缘”一句,则说明其与前文的关联。“一切”:即全部、毫无剩余,因其作用已被完整表述了。显示巴利原文
Vicayoti vicayahārasampāto, so vuccatīti attho. Esa nayo ito paresupi. ‘‘Tividhampi dānamaya’’ntiādinā padatthavicayaṃ dasseti, tena assādādayo, itare ca vicayahārapadatthā atthato vicitā eva hontīti. Rūpādiārammaṇassa pariccāgo vuttoti sambandho. Sabboti sakalo anavasesato kiccassa vuttattā.
因为说到“乐于布施者……为近因”,表明喜乐布施者,其舍的决意得以圆满。因为说到“自制……为近因”,表明安住于离虚诳语、住于实语者,其真实的决意得以圆满。因为说到“善巧者……为近因”,表明由善巧相应及断除诸恶,智慧得以圆满。因为说到“贪等……为近因”,表明贪等烦恼无余断尽之时,寂灭自然现前。显示巴利原文
Dānābhiratassa cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ pāripūriṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘dadato…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Viratisacce, vacīsacce ca tiṭṭhato saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ pāripūriṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṃyama…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Kosallayogato ca pāpappahānato ca paññāpāripūriṃ gacchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘kusalo…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Anavasesarāgādīsu pahīnesu upasamo upaṭṭhito nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘rāga…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti.
“善巧”一词,是依补特伽罗而安立的善巧正见,故注疏中说:“善巧者……因具道支等共通之相,故同一相。”“等”字还涵盖了菩提分法等层面的含义。“应耗尽之状态”,即指应被断除的状态。显示巴利原文
Kusaloti puggalādhiṭṭhānena kosallasammādiṭṭhi vuttāti āha ‘‘kusalo…pe… maggaṅgādibhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā’’ti. Ādisaddena bodhipakkhiyabhāvādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Khepetabbabhāvenāti pahātabbabhāvena.
“无怨”即无怨敌。“以诸善法”即依无过失法,其用意在于证得果与涅槃。对布施的大果报性、由戒等功德成就的导师无上应供性,以及无取著般涅槃进行观察,便是此布施的起因;此理在经中已得确立。词源与起因的关联甚为明了,故说“应说明词源与起因的关联”。显示巴利原文
Averatanti asapattataṃ. Kusaladhammehīti anavajjadhammehi, phalanibbānehīti adhippāyo. Dānassa mahapphalatā, sīlādiguṇehi satthu anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvo, anupādāparinibbānanti imesaṃ paccavekkhaṇā imassa dānassa nidānanti ayamattho pāḷiyaṃ niruḷhova. Nibbacananidānasandhayo suviññeyyāvāti āha ‘‘nibbacananidānasandhayo vattabbā’’ti.
“通过阐明对立面而说‘集’,是为了教示。这种与悭吝等染污同分的集,正是由对立面的说明而被确定的。‘以无贪等……布施等法’:布施等法由无贪等所生,而这些法已为‘布施’等词所摄,故注疏抉择‘这三善根’为善根。‘它们’即指善根。”显示巴利原文
Paṭipakkhaniddesena samudayoti desanatthaṃ paṭipakkhaniddesanena niddhārito ayaṃ macchariyādisaṃkilesapakkhiko samudayo. Alobhena…pe… dānādīhīti yehi alobhādīhi dānādayo dhammā sambhavanti, tāni dānādiggahaṇeneva gahitānīti kusalamūlāni niddhāreti ‘‘imāni tīṇi kusalānī’’ti. Tesanti kusalamūlānaṃ.
“因怖畏而施”指以赠礼等方式而行施;“因贪爱而施”指为了获得同类的物品而行施;“因贪求利养而施”指以贿赂等方式而行施。或者,“出于悲悯而行施”是在悲悯的福田上;“出于尊敬而行施”是在功德田或恩惠田上。“因怖畏而退避”是说由于怖畏而退缩。通过这样的自制,确实不会积聚怨仇。如此,一切不善的果报都是恶的,应当这样结合来理解。显示巴利原文
Bhayahetu deti paṇṇākārādivasena. Rāgahetu deti sabhāgavatthussa. Āmisakiñcikkhahetu deti lañjādivasena. Anukampanto vā karuṇākhette. Apacayamāno guṇakhette, upakārakhette vā. Bhayūparatoti bhayena orato. Tena tathārūpena saṃyamena veraṃ na ciyateva. Evaṃ sabbassa akusalassa pāpako vipākoti yojanā.
正如以“施予者”等语句,显示了由否定布施而来的翻转,同样,也应以否定断除来显示翻转,所以说:“然而,不善者并不舍离。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Dadato’’tiādinā yathā dānapaṭikkhepena parivattanaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ pahānapaṭikkhepenapi parivattanaṃ dassetabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘akusalo pana na jahātī’’ti.
深信业果,于布施行中精勤,按照应施的方法令正念现前、使心等持、以正见为前导,如此便是在布施上正确地行道。所以说:“布施即是……”。显示巴利原文
Kammaphalaṃ saddahanto dānakiriyāyaṃ padahanto yena vidhinā dānaṃ dātabbaṃ, tattha satiṃ upaṭṭhapento cittaṃ samādahanto sammādiṭṭhiṃ purakkharonto dāne sammāpaṭipanno hotīti āha ‘‘dānaṃ nāma…pe… hotī’’ti.
修习与断除的安立,在经文中依其自相即可了知。为显示足处异名的安立,故说“那是戒的足处”等,这很容易了解。此外,此中未从义理上详加分别的其余内容,应知既可依已说之理而了知,也因其义本身明显。显示巴利原文
Bhāvanāpahānasamāropanāni pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato viññāyantīti padaṭṭhānavevacanasamāropanāni dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃ sīlassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyaṃ. Aññañca yadettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ vuttanayattā, uttānatthattā cāti veditabbaṃ.